Employer's Requirement - EPC

Government of Nepal
Ministry of Energy, Water Resources and Irrigation

ALTERNATIVE ENERGY PROMOTION
CENTRE
NEP: South Asia Sub regional Economic Cooperation Power System Expansion Project
(SASEC/ADB)
ADB Project No: 44219, Loan No: 3139 NEP (SF), Grant No: 0398NEP (EF)
Bidding Document
for
Procurement
of
Lower Bom Khola Mini Hydro Subproject
Khumbu Pasang Lhamu Gaupalika, Solukhumbu

District Nepal
PART II Requirements
Section 6 – Employer’s Requirements (ERQ)

Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements 6-1
Section 6 – Employer’s Requirements
Table of Contents
Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Drawings ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3
Supplementary Information Regarding Works to Be Procured ........................................................... 6-4
Personnel Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 6-5
Equipment Requirements .................................................................................................................... 6-6
Bidding Document for Lower Bom Khola MHP Procurement of Works-Small Contract Single-Stage: Two-Envelope
6-2Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements 6-2
I. Specifications
[Attached Separately]
Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Works-Small Contract Bidding Document for Lower Bom Khola MHP
II. Drawings
III. Supplementary Information
(Regarding Works to Be Procured)
IV. Personnel Requirements
Using Form PER-1 and PER-2 in Section 4 (Bidding Forms), the Bidder must demonstrate that it has
personnel who meet the following requirements:
Total Work Experience In Similar

No. Position Qualification Experience Work
[years] [years]
1 Project Manager- Master’s degree in 5 years 2 Years
Engineering or
Bachelor’s in
Engineering
7 years
2 Civil Engineer Bachelor’s in 3 years 1 Year
Engineering
3 Electrical Engineer Bachelor’s in 3 years 1 Year
Engineering
4 Mechanical Engineer Bachelor’s in 3 years 1 Year
Engineering
V. Equipment Requirements
Using Form EQU in Section 4 (Bidding Forms), the Bidder must demonstrate that it has the key
equipment listed below:
No. Equipment Type and Characteristics Minimum Number Required
1 Excavator 1
2 Vibrator 2
3 Concrete Mixture 1
4 Tractor 1
5 Roller 1
6 Tipper 2
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements Specifications 6-2 -1
SCOPE OF WORKS
The works includes construction of civil components, procurement of electro-mechanical, hydro-
mechanical and transmission & distribution line & equipment's and it installation, Commissioning
and testing with one year operation and maintenance at the location mentioned as in the salient
features below. In addition, the works to be executed under the Contract which shall include
construction, completion and maintenance of such works, but not limited to, are prescribed
below:
(1) Infrastructure Works
 Employer’s Camp, Providing Office Space and equipment to Employer and Facilities
including Electrification, Water Supply& Sanitary& Drainage Works, Fencing, Protection
Works etc.
 Supply, Installation, Operation & Maintenance of Complete Site Communication System
 Operation & maintenance of Construction Power for the project.
(2) River Diversion Works and Construction of Headworks Waterway and Powerhouse
Structures
SALIENT FEATURES
1. Location/General
State Province No. 1
District: Solukhumbu
VDC: Khumbu Pasang Lhamu Gaupalika
River: Bom Khola
Load Centers: ward nos: 4 & 8
Total Beneficiary Households: 617
Total Population: 3702
Design Power: 200 KW
Average Subscribing Power: 324 watt/HH
Ownership: Public company/Community
Airport: Lukla (Flight from Kathmandu)
Road head: Kathmandu-Ghurmi-Salleri (black Topped
Highway)-Salleri -Surkey-Lukla (Trekking
Route)
2. Hydrology
Catchment Area at Headwork Site: 10.11 km²
Mean Monthly Annual Flow: 0.588 m³/s
Design Discharge (Q80%): 0.105 cumecs
Design Flood (1 in 100 year): 51.55 cumecs (Weir)
3. Diversion Weir
Type: Cascade Spillway type
Length: 13.0 m
Crest level: El. 2656.5 masl
4. Intake
Type: Side Orifice
Side Orifice: 0.5mX0.25m
Nos. of gates: 1
Intake Invert Level: El 2655.75 m
5. Under sluice
Type: Sediment Excluder
Size: 1.0 m wide, 1.0 m height
Length: 10 m
Under sluice Invert Level: El 2654.25 m
6. Intake Canal
Section: Rectangular
Size (B x H): 0.45 m x 0.5 m including free
board
Length: 13.7m
7. Settling Basin
Type: Rectangular, Intermittent Flushing
Size (L x B x H): 10.0m x 2.0m x 2.0m
No of Bays: 1
Nominal size of trapped particle: 0.015mm
8. Headrace Pipe
Type: HDPE pipe buried to ground
Length: 813 m
Internal Diameter: 300 mm
9. Surge Tank
Type: Rectangular / Surface
Size (L x W): 2.5 m x 2.5 m
Height (H): 5 m
10. Penstock Pipe Alignment
Length: 523.6 (Slope Length)
Diameter: 300 mm (Internal)
Minimum Shell Thickness: 5 mm (Upto AB5)
6 mm (From AB5 to AB7)
8 mm (After AB7)
11. Powerhouse
Type of powerhouse: Surface
Size (L x B x H): 13.3 m x 12.2 m x 4.7 m
12. Tailrace Conduit

Type: Rectangular Stone Masonry Conduit
Size (B x H): 0.45 m x 0.5 m including free
board
Length: 15 m
13. Turbines
Type: Horizontal shaft, Pelton
No. of units: 1
Rated output per unit: 240 kW
Rated net head: 240.86 m
Rated speed: 1000 rpm
Runaway speed: 1800 rpm
Rated efficiency: 87.5 %
14. Generators
Type: Synchronous, 3-phase, horizontal shaft,
Salient pole revolving field
No of units: 1
Rated output: 300 kVA
Rated generation voltage: 400V
Rated power factor: 0.8 (lagging)
Rated efficiency: 92.0 %
Voltage regulation: ±5%
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
Rated speed: 1000 rpm
No. of poles: 6
Short circuit ratio: 1.2
Stator/ rotor insulation: Class F
Excitation: Brushless
15. Power and Energy

Type of Power Plant: Run-of-river
Design Discharge: 0.1 m³/s
Total Gross Head: 244.0 m
Rated Net Head: 240.86 m
Installed Capacity: 200 KW
Average Annual Deemed Energy: 1.599 Gwh
Dry Energy: 0.467 GWh
Wet Energy: 1.061 Gwh
Transmission Line
Voltage Level: 11 kV Single Circuit &
400 V (Distribution Line)
Length: 34.38 Km
(3) Hydro-mechanical Works
The supply shall include, but not limited to design, manufacture, quality assurance and
delivery to Site, erection, commissioning and guarantee services and remedying of defects for
all equipment as specified in the Technical Specifications.
The following equipment shall be supplied under the contract:
1) Sluice Gate: One complete set of sluice gate with its guide frame and hoists with
their accessories.
2) Intake inlet Gates: One vertical slide gate with its guide frame is provided to
regulate flow into the waterway. In front of the gate a coarse trashrack is
provided.
3) Gravel Trap Flushing Gates: One complete set of vertical lift flushing gate with
its guide frame and hoists with their accessories.
4) Settling basin inlet gates: One complete sets of settling basin inlet gates with its
guide frame and Operating mechanism.
5) Settling basin flushing gates: One complete sets of settling basin flushing gates
with its guide frame and hoists with their accessories.
6) Penstock inlet sates: One complete sets of Penstock inlet Gates with Its guide
frame and hoists with their accessories.
7) Tailrace gate: One complete set of tailrace gates with its guide frame
and hoists with their accessories.
8) Stop-log: Stop-logs are provided to facilitate repair of main gates and at places
where the operation will not be frequent. Some of the stop-logs provisioned for
Lower Bom Khola MHP are at intake, Settling Basin and Tailrace.
4. Electro-mechanical Works
The supply shall include, but not limited to design, manufacture, quality assurance and delivery
to Site, erection, commissioning and guarantee services and remedying of defects for all
equipment as specified in the Technical Specifications.
The following requirement of equipment shall be supplied under the contract:
 All the equipment shall be new, durable to withstand long time use, and shall satisfy
all requirements, which a complete product should generally meet even if such are
not expressly provided in the specifications.
 All the equipment shall be of a convenient construction for disassembling, inspection

and erection. All surfaces of water passages shall be of even smooth finish
turbulence.
 The Contractor shall furnish installation materials as specified in the Technical
Specifications.
 Conductors shall not be joint by soldering except where absolutely unavoidable
 Inductions motors shall be of the direct line starting, open guarded type, and when
operated, shall not develop trouble under voltage fluctuation of +/-10%. Neither shall
they exhibit any trouble at rise in voltage and frequency of power source by 30% and
40% respectively, resulting from the full load rejection of the turbine generator.
 Magnetic contractors used in various switches shall be made of arc resistant metal
and have sufficient capacity against inrush current and the contact part shall be free
from over-wearing and miscontact for a reasonable period of service.
 AC control circuits shall be designed for operation at 220v. Thereby the Contractor
for the relevant control system shall provide 400/220 V auxiliary transformer.
 The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of anchor bolts and foundation bolts as
necessary for the equipment.
 The relays (Control relays, Protection relays and auxiliary relays) and meters shall be
suitable for the control system.
 The cubicles for the Equipment shall be provided with group fault indicator, unless
otherwise provided in the specifications. When any trouble is detected, the trouble
shall be distinguished on this indicator and contacts shall be provided in the indicator
and control on the cubicle.
 Cubicles shall be provided with a fluorescent light (230V AC, 1ph. 50Hz) inside for
interior lighting, and shall be provided with a door switch and a moisture-preventing
heater (230V AC. 1ph. 50Hz).
 The bushings, insulators and porcelain housing used in the equipment shall have
sufficient mechanical and electrical strength and shall meet the requirements of
relevant standards.
 The ground terminal of the equipment shall be provided and be suitable for hard
drawn copper stranded conductor. All grounding works shall be done with hard drawn
copper.
5. Transmission and Distribution Line Works
The supply shall include, but not limited to manufacture, quality assurance and delivery to
Site, erection, commissioning and guarantee services and remedying of defects for all
equipment as specified in the Technical Specifications.
In addition to above works in Item No. 1 to 5, the Contractor shall provide training to the
Employer's personnel as required, to establish a well-trained operation and maintenance
crew.
If the specifications and/or drawings of this Bidding Document do not contain particulars of
materials or works which are obviously necessary for the proper and safe completion,
operation and maintenance of the equipment in question, all such materials and works shall
be deemed to be included in the supply.
6. Preparatory Works
The Bidder shall visit and examine the project site and its’ surrounding to obtain for himself,
on his responsibility, all information that may be necessary for preparing the Bidding and
entering into a contract. The costs of visiting the site shall be at their own expense.
Likewise, the Contractor shall also construct temporary roads to various sites such as to the
quarry sites, camp, storage yards and other project structures and such cost shall not be
separately paid to the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the respective items
of the Bill of Quantities. Temporary access road to the various sites requires frequent repair
and maintenance especially at river crossings. These costs shall be deemed included the
respective items of the Bill of Quantity.
Section 6 - Employers Requirement Specification (Civil works) 6- 2- 7
PART II- I.B: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. General provisions .............................................................................................. 8

2. Earthworks and excavation ............................................................................... 10
3. Embankments and backfilling ........................................................................... 14
4. Gabions & Mattresses ....................................................................................... 16
5. River Diversion and Cofferdams ....................................................................... 18
6. Dewatering ........................................................................................................ 18
7. Concreting Materials ......................................................................................... 21
8. Concreting and Tests ........................................................................................ 24
9. Shotcrete or Spread Concrete .......................................................................... 37
10. Formwork ....................................................................................................... 41
11. Reinforcement Steel ....................................................................................... 42
12. Pre-Cast Concrete .......................................................................................... 43
13. Cement Mortar ............................................................................................... 44
14. Joint Sealing ................................................................................................... 45
15. Stone Works ................................................................................................... 49
16. Geo-Textiles ................................................................................................... 52
17. Surface and Subsurface Drain ....................................................................... 53
18. Brick Masonry Work ....................................................................................... 56
19. Plaster & Tile Work ......................................................................................... 57
20. Door and Window ........................................................................................... 60
21. Plumbing, Drainage and Sanitary Fittings ...................................................... 62
22. Paint, Glazing, and CGI Roofing .................................................................... 63
23. Electrical ......................................................................................................... 66
Bidding document of Lower Bom Khola MHP Procurement of works-small contract Single Stage- Two Envelope
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements Specifications (Civil Works) 6-2 -8
CHAPTER 1. 3 PART II B CIVIL SPECIFICATION

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 Scope of Works
The Contractor shall carry out the following works for the construction of Bom Khola Mini Hydro
Project including all surface civil works viz river diversion & protection works, diversion weir, side
intake, connecting canal, settling basin, Headrace Canal, forebay, civil works in penstock
alignment, retaining structures saddle supports, anchor blocks, powerhouse, civil works in
switchyard, Tailrace, river training, temporary diversion, employer’s camp and associated
facilities of the project.
1.2 Cutting Trees in Project Area
Contractor shall not cut any trees on the site until permission has been given by the employer.
The contractor shall submit to the employer, at least 21 days before the commencement of
construction, a written request with a detailed drawing showing the trees to be felled together
with the outlines of the relevant temporary or permanent structures.
Along with the drawing, the contractor shall submit details as to when the trees must be cut to
maintain the schedule.
The employer shall be responsible for liaising with and obtaining all necessary licenses for tree
cutting from the GON, Department of Forestry or Community Forest User’s committee.
1.3 Tidiness of Site
The contractor shall be responsible for the proper upkeep and maintenance of the site and the
works and shall remove rubbish garbage and other waste as it accumulates from the Site.
Materials and equipment shall be positioned, stored and stacked in an orderly manner.
1.4 Levels and Reference Points
The datum point for co-ordinates and levels shall be the permanent benchmarks as indicated on
the Drawings.
The contractor shall satisfy himself that the existing ground levels as indicated on the drawings
are correct. Should the contractor wish to dispute any levels he shall submit to the engineer a
schedule of the position of the levels considered to be an error and a set of revised levels. The
existing ground relevant to the disputed levels shall not be disturbed before the engineer’s
decision as to the correct levels is given.
1.5 Survey and Setting Out
The contractor shall install all level and survey stations required. Such stations shall be of robust
construction, protected against damage and the influence of movement that may arise from the
execution of the works.
The contractor shall check the condition and re-survey the survey stations at a certain intervals
during the progress of the works.
The contractor shall provide the engineer with the location and description of all survey stations,
the results of surveys and all calculations. Where required, he shall give adequate opportunities
for the engineer to check such stations prior to their use.
The degree of accuracy employed in the survey and setting out shall be such as will allow the
alignment, levels and dimensions specified for the works to be achieved.
The contractor shall ensure that all surveying equipment used for the works is of appropriate
accuracy, is properly maintained and that the equipment complies with the manufacturer’s
specification for accuracy. If requested, he shall give adequate evidence to the engineer that the
calibration of the surveying equipment has been confirmed.
Single Stage- Two Envelope Procurement of works-small contract Bidding document of Lower Bom Khola MHP
1.6 Standby Equipment

The contractor shall provide sufficient spares and standby equipment, in particular with respect
to concrete mixing and transportation plant and dewatering plant to ensure completion of crucial
operations such as continuous pouring of concrete in case of breakdown of duty equipment.
1.7 Works Affecting Watercourses
The contractor shall notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of his intention to start any part of the
works affecting a river course.
1.7.1 Diversions
The contractor shall plan, design, construct and maintain all necessary diversion works including
cofferdams, channels, flumes, drains and sumps and any other temporary diversion and
protective works.
The contractor's plan for the diversion and care of the river shall be subject to the approval for
the engineer, but such approval shall not relieve the contractor of the full responsibility for the
adequacy of the diversion and protective works. Any hydrological data made available to the
contractor is solely for the purpose of guidance, and the employer does not guarantee the
reliability or accuracy of any such data.
After having served their purpose, all cofferdams or other temporary protective works shall be
removed or levelled in a manner satisfactory to the engineer so as not to interfere in any way
with the normal flow of the river or with operation or usefulness of the works.
1.7.2 Dewatering
The contractor shall provide, install, maintain and operate all necessary pumping and other
equipment for dewatering the various parts of the works in order to keep the excavations,
foundations and other parts of the works free from water as required for constructing each part of
the works.
The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining watercourses within the site in effective
working condition at all times.
1.8 Explosives Handling
The contractor shall make all arrangements for the procurement, importation, transportation,
storage, guarding, and use of all explosives if deemed inevitable for the execution of the project.
The employer shall assist the contractor in getting government approval and liaise with
government authorities in acquiring permission to procure, transport, store and use of explosives
for the execution of the work.
1.8.1 Transportation to the Site
The contractor shall pay all costs of purchasing, transporting, storing and using of explosives for
the project. However, the contractor shall not be responsible to pay the employer or his
representative’s staff including the engineer who will assist the contractor while procuring,
transporting, storing and using of explosives.
1.8.2 Explosives Bunkers
The contractor shall construct a bunker of sufficient space to contain up to one week’s use of
explosives at the site. The location of the each explosives magazine on the site shall be
approved in writing by the engineer.
1.8.3 Accommodation for Security Personnel
The contractor shall construct temporary accommodation and facilities at the site for use by the
explosives security personnel. Details of required facilities to be agreed by the commander of
the security personnel before construction begin.
1.8.4 Records of Explosive
The contractor shall solely responsible for keeping all records of explosive consumed and stored.
Register shall be maintained at bunker and each site showing date, location, amount of explosive
and detonator, purpose, name and signature of responsible persons. Where required, the
contractor shall give adequate access for the engineer to check the records.
1.9 Management Meetings
Site meetings will normally be held weekly but will be called for whenever the progress of the
works so requires, or when required by the engineer. On behalf of the contractor, the contractor's
representative who shall be the powers to commit the contractor in all matters concerning the
contract shall represent all meetings.
Other management meetings will be held in Kathmandu as required.
1.10 Site Diary
The contractor shall keep a site diary wherein full details of all work carried out each day (each
shift if more than one shift of work) shall be recorded. The diary shall be available for inspection
by the Employer or Engineer at any time during normal office hours. At least the following details
shall be included:
• Location of the various works undertaken
• Type and quality of work achieved
• Equipment and plant that arrive on site
• Number of employees and plant working
• Tests carried out and results
• Weather conditions
• Accidents
• Visitors to the Site
• Photographs of major activities and events
• Interaction with local people
1.11 Reference to other Sections
Throughout the Specification references are occasionally made to other Sections. All such
references are intended solely for the convenience of those using the documents, and the
absence of a reference in no manner excludes the application of every other Section in the
Specification, which may have any bearing upon the point in question. The intention being that
the Contract Documents shall be read and applied as a whole.
2. EARTHWORKS AND EXCAVATION
2.1 Site Clearance
This work shall consist of clearing, grubbing and stripping the area of the work within the limits of
the site as defined in the drawings and ordered by the Engineer for all trees, stumps, bushes,
roots, down-timber, rotten wood, rubbish, debris, humus, swamp material and any other
vegetation of unacceptable material.
It shall include the removal of buildings, foundations, fences, retaining walls and other
obstructions interfering with the proposed work, salvaging such of these material as may be
designated by the Engineer, and burning or otherwise disposing of the spoils in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer before work starts and mutually agreed upon in a protocol and layout
plan.
Materials suitable for use of any kind may be separated by the contractor, if so approved by the
Engineer. All other materials shall be placed or handled as described hereinafter.
The contractor shall perform the work of clearing, grubbing and stripping to remove the material
herein specified. If he chooses to remove the waste material suitable for incorporation into or use
on the work, the amount of suitable material shall be replaced by the contractor at his expenses.
All material removed by the cleaning, grubbing and stripping operation shall be removed from the
site of burned or otherwise disposed as directed by the engineer. Care shall be exercised to see
that the burning of such material does not destroy or damage public or private property, and the
contractor shall be fully responsible for any destruction, damage or nuisance.
Living trees outside of grading limits shall be cut only as specified or directed by the Engineer
and all branches of trees extending into the limits shall be trimmed carefully to give a clear height
as required over the site.
Within areas where excavation or filling is to be carried out, the ground shall be cleared for all
living or dead trees, and stumps and root mats shall be removed to a depth of not less than 0.3
m below the surface or a depth as directed by the Engineer. With the exception of areas to be
excavated, all depressions made, below the ground surface by the removal of stumps or roots
shall be refilled with suitable material and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No
grubbing and stripping operation will be required in disposal areas and in areas to be excavated,
unless the excavated materials shall be used in permanent fills or cofferdam.
Measurement and Payment
Clearing grumbling and stripping executed outside the limits indicated on the drawings without
written order from the Engineer will not be paid to the Contractor.
All areas cleared, grubbed and stripped will be paid according to square meter of required area
covered by the design and as mentioned in BOQ
Feelings of trees will be paid according to the actual number of trees of different trunks diameter
measured 0.30 m or above.
2.2 Open Cut Excavation
2.2.1 General
Excavations shall be executed as specified in the sub chapter and in accordance with the lines
and slopes shown on the Drawings, or as indicated by the Engineer. During the progress of the
work, it will at times be necessary or advisable to alter the slopes or the dimensions of the
excavations shown on the Drawings. Any increase or decrease of the excavated quantities
resulting from the above mentioned alternations will not affect the unit prices of the excavation,
which shall be executed by the Contractor at the unit prices of the contract for each one of the
excavation items.
Excavations shall be done to the required dimensions and shall be finished according to the
specified lines and slopes, in a way acceptable to the Engineer. All necessary precautions shall
be taken to cause the minimum possible alternation or disturbance to the material lying under
and adjacent to the excavation final lines.
Method
The Contractor shall carry out his operations in such a manner as to avoid damage to, or
deterioration of, the Final Surfaces of excavations.
Unless otherwise directed, prior to the work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer details
concerning the methods and equipment proposed for each section or type of open cut
excavation, including support methods, drilling and blasting patterns as appropriate.
The sides of excavations shall be adequately supported at all times or may be battered as
described in the Contract or permitted by the Engineer.
Final surface
If the Contractor encounters ground in the Final surface which he considers unsuitable, or if the
Final surface is damaged or allowed to deteriorate, the Engineer shall be promptly informed.
Excavation shall be carried out to the lines, levels, slopes and dimensions as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Any excavation in excess of such dimensions or
instructions shall be made good with suitable, well-compacted material or concrete as directed
by the Engineer.
In general excavation tolerance shall be within + 50 mm unless specified on the Drawings.
When the excavation has reached the lines and grades required, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer. No excavation shall be backfilled or covered in any way until the Engineer has given
his approval.
2.2.2 Soil Classification
The classification of excavated material is declared at Bill of Quantities of the concerned are as
per design, levels and geographical investigation done at site.
The classification of the excavated material shall be determined by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall inform the Engineer when excavation is to take place in material other than prescribed only
if there is more than ±20% variation in the classification in total works with proof verified by site
engineers.
Hard Rock
Hard Rock means solid rock which can be removed only by explosives, barring, wedging or other
recognized and approved methods of quarrying solid rock, and shall furthermore mean
excavation of all existing concrete and masonry blocks in cement mortar.
Boulder Mix Soil
Excavation which can be carried out manually without blasting is categorized in this group which
generally forms form the alluvial deposit of the River or formed in the floodplain in shallow depth
of deposit above bedrock including boulder which can be removed without using explosives in
the field.
Soft Soil
Excavation which can be carried out with simple excavating equipment and there are rare
occurrence of boulder is categorized in soft soil group e.g. at the field or abandoned Terrance of
cultivated land. Alluvial deposits, weathered rock mass and disposal site or embankment
movement shall all be counted as soft soil.
Whatever mentioned in the definition, the site engineer and geologist at site shall determine the
type and will be final, only the variation of more than 20% in total excavation price in the
complete works shall only be entertained from such changes in rock classification.
2.2.3 Over Excavation
If somewhere, and for any reason, excavations are executed beyond the established lines and
without the Engineer's previous approval, the Contractor shall backfill with rubble concrete or
other approved materials at his own expense, the volume corresponding to over-excavation. He
will not receive any payment for over-excavations not approved or the back-filling thereof.
Cavities or over-excavation at the bottom or at the sides or rock excavations against which
concrete is to be placed, whether due to lack or care on the part of the Contractor when making
the excavation or due to the removal of materials damaged through and excess or explosives
when effecting the blasting or by the use or unsuitable excavation system, with the Engineer's
approval, shall be fully backfilled at the Contractor's expense, with concrete of the same quality
as the concrete of the structure to be erected in this place.
2.2.4 Backfilling
Foundations and structures shall be backfilled with approved material compacted in layers by
suitable equipment until optimum stability has been obtained to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Compacting shall be carried out with special care by means of pneumatic or mechanical tampers
or other compactors of a type previously approved by the Engineer to avoid damage structures.
Surfaces receiving fill layers shall, if smooth, be previously prepared to obtain a good key
between the new fill layer and the sub grade.
Backfilling of foundation work with rock shall be carried out only after foundations have been
inspected by the Engineer and this method has been particularly directed.
If payment is not provided for under a special item in the Bill of Quantities for back filling &
compaction, it will be deemed to be included in the unit prices of excavation. Fill shall not be
deposited under water without the Engineer's permission. This permission will not normally be
granted for cohesive soils or for fill of any kind where the standing water, in the opinion of the
Engineer, can be pumped out or diverted. Permission may be granted to place rock fill by
random dumping in area where the depth of water is greater than 50 cm but the methods and
quality of the fill material shall be subject to approval and when the fill level is 50 cm above the
water surface it shall be compacted until there is no discernible settlement under the equipment
used for placing or compacting fill. Thereafter, normal backfilling and compaction shall be
resumed.
Where swamps, marshes, bogs or other similar wet areas have to be traversed by the works,
they shall be drained as directed by the Engineer according to the materials and conditions
encountered. Prior to the formation of backfilling, embankments, fills, etc any unsuitable
materials occurring on the Site shall be removed to such depths and widths as may be directed
by the Engineer and the resultant excavations shall be properly backfilled with suitable and
approved excavated materials and shall be deposited and compacted to the satisfactions of the
Engineer.
Where backfilling is to be placed on steep sloping ground, the surface of the ground shall be
benched in steps or trenches as directed by the Engineer, or where the ground is wet or spongy
or likely to be detrimentally affected by water, the contractor shall remove all unsuitable material
and if necessary under drain the site as may be directed by the Engineer before benching or
trenching is carried out.
2.2.5 Blasting
Fuses, detonators or blasting caps shall not be transported or stored with dynamite or other
explosives under any circumstances. The location and design of the storage places, the
transportation methods and the precautions that shall be taken to prevent accident shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval or the security force’s approval, but it is understood that this
approval does not exempt the contractor of his responsibility with regard to the handling of
dynamite or other explosives.
Drilling and blasting plans shall be submitted well in advance for the Engineer's approval prior to
the commencement of any blasting work.
All blasting shall be carried out carefully by approved experts only and the Contractor shall be
fully liable for any claims arising from damages or alleged damages, injury to the public, etc due
to the blasting.
The Contractor shall insure with an approved insurance company against all claims with respect
to damages and injury arising from blasting.
The Contractor shall not obtain or make use of any explosives without the express permission in
writing of the security forces or other authorities concerned of GON.
The contractor shall comply strictly with the regulation as required by the authorities regarding
purchase, storage, issuance and use of explosives and transport of same to and from the Site ,
and shall be deemed to have included in his tender all costs arising from the use, storage and
transport of explosives arising from supervision of blasting by security forces.
Blasting shall furthermore be strictly and in every case subject to the Engineer's permission.
When blasting is carried out, trees, structures, etc. in exposed position shall be adequately
protected from damage without additional payment.
Drilling and blasting shall be arranged and, where necessary, the rock being blasted shall be
protected so as to prevent any scattering of the rock liable to cause injury to the public or
damage to dwellings, buildings and other property and the works.
Blasting shall be carried out carefully, the methods shall be such that shock and vibration will be
minimized and the loosening of rock surfaces are avoided, particularly in those cases where
concrete is to be placed directly against these rock surfaces.
Modern controlled blasting methods such as pre-splitting cushion blasting, smooth blasting, and
where applicable line drilling shall be used.
The Engineer may even order modified explosive charges or excavation without explosives. All
these alternatives shall be included in the unit rates for excavation.
During thunderstorms and other electrical disturbances, no charging or firing will be permitted
Blasting shall be carried out at specified times to be agreed upon by the Contractor and
Engineer. Sufficient notices and barriers shall be erected and immediately before blasting
adequate warning shall be given to workers on the site and to the public so that no one may
come within the danger zone until blasting is finished. Upon completion of blasting an "all clear"
signal shall be given. This signal shall be withheld by the responsible blasting master or blasting
engineer until he is satisfied that all charges loaded have been detonated and that no delayed
explosives or miss-firings can be expected. Adequate warning, as mentioned above, shall be
given and the portion of site shall be cleared before electrical resistance measuring or testing of
the firing line is carried out.
The Contractor shall record on agreed forms, all blasting events including location, time, charge,
purpose etc. These records shall be available to the Engineer at any time.
When directed by the Engineer, prior to each blast in areas within 200 m of permanent structures
the contractor shall submit information to the Engineer, about location of blast, number and depth
of holes, weight and types of powder loaded per hole, delays used in the blast, method of wiring
the blast, kilograms of powder per delay etc.
The Contractor shall be liable for any damage caused by scattering of rock, boulders or other
materials being blasted and for the scattering of any material whatsoever overlying or in the
immediate vicinity of the rock, boulder or other material which is being blasted and all such
fragment shall be removed.
Underwater blasting will not be permitted beneath the water in contact with permanent structure.
2.2.6 Measurement and payment
The Earthwork in excavation and over cut excavation shall be paid in Cubic meter from the
design line level and x-sections. The over excavation and excessive blasting shall not be paid,
also the disposal of the over excavated material or material dumped from such consequences
shall not be paid.
If the Engineer orders excavations beyond the lines indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor
will be paid for the over excavation at the stipulated unit price.
Whatever mentioned in the definition of rock classification, the site engineer and geologist at site
shall determine the type and will be final, only the variation of more than 10% in total excavation
price shall only be entertained for revision from such changes in rock classification.
3. EMBANKMENTS AND BACKFILLING
3.1 Fills
For the purpose of these specifications, the term "Embankment" includes all portions of dam or
coffer dam construction and earth and/or rock works by filling with suitable material to lines and
grades shown on the Drawings and/or as otherwise provided in the contract document or as
directed by the Engineer.
To the greatest extent possible, all suitable materials obtained from excavation shall be used for
the construction of embankment. Distribution within embankments of construction materials from
excavation shall be done in the way indicated by the Engineer.
Materials for backfills shall be obtained from the borrow areas or from excavation for the works
whenever the Engineer so approves.
The Contractor shall maintain all embankment fills and instruction until final acceptance of the
work.
3.2 Materials
3.2.1 General
The miscellaneous fill portions of embankment such as core , filters, rock zones, etc shall be
constructed of selected materials from excavation for structures on the work, from quarried or
borrow areas as selected by the Engineer.
The location and extent of all quarries and borrow pits within the designed areas shall be as
The Engineer reserves the right to modify the limits or location of quarries and borrow pits within
the limits of the respective areas as shown on the drawing in order to obtain suitable material
and to minimize stripping operations and the amount of waste material. All materials used to form
dam embankment shall meet the requirements of the pertinent tests as ordered or directed by
the Engineer.
The quantity and quality of the embankment material in its borrow areas shall be investigated by
means of exploration in an adequate form before and during excavation for and by laboratory
and field tests.
If the natural material does not fulfill the requirements for the embankment material as specified
or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall treat the material by appropriate methods like
blasting, crushing, selection, mixing, screening, moistening, drying etc in order to obtain the
required proportion.
3.2.2 Sealing Material
Natural Sealing Material
The construction of a sealing zone within an embankment shall preferably consist of cohesive
soils available from selected borrow areas. The soil mechanics classification and properties shall
be obtained by laboratory and field tests.
If necessary, the material shall be thoroughly mixed, dried or moistened or treated in any
required way as described in the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer in order to
obtain a uniform material of required condition throughout the sealing zone of the embankment.
The material shall be free from any deleterious admixtures such as soluble or disperse minerals,
organic material etc.
Artificial Material
The construction of a sealing zone within an embankment shall consist of artificial materials such
as asphalt concrete, concrete, earth concrete, sheet piles etc. as shown on the drawings and/ or
as directed by the Engineer in case no natural sealing material is available or for any other
reason in the judgment of Engineer.
Classification, properties and dimension of the artificial sealing material shall be in accordance
with the contract document or with the instructions of the Engineer. They shall only be used after
approved of the Engineer.
If the materials are not in accordance with standard, the properties shall be determined by
laboratory and field tests.
3.2.3 Earth-fill Materials

Earth- fill materials within an embankment shall consist of cohesive soil or non-cohesive soil with
cohesive components of medium to low permeability, Earth fill material can be obtained from
overburden, colluviums, lateritic soil, river deposits, young un compacted geological layers,
decomposed and weathered rock etc.
3.2.4 Gravel-fill Material
Gravel material within an embankment shall consist of rounded gravel with or without sand and
pebbles but without cohesive components of low permeability. Gravel fill material can be
obtained from river deposits or from the excavated material.
3.3 Prevention of Damage in the Event of Floods
To prevent damage to slope protection, structures of any kind, etc, in the event of floods, the
contractor shall make all possible efforts to protect unfinished slopes, embankment slopes, etc
by temporary covers. The materials required for this purpose shall be stored by the contractor
near the place of use.
3.4 Ground or Surface Water
Unless otherwise stipulated under the items covering bank protection work in the contract
document, the contractor shall safely divert any ground or surface water without extra payment
for this work.
3.5 Measurement and payment
The embankment and backfilling shall be paid in unit rate as per BOQ in cubic meter for the
design volume to be filled in including haulage and supplying other reinforcement material, laying
of geotextile however shall be paid extra based on square meter. The Contractor shall not be
paid for the over excavation disposal and embankments from such items whatsoever
4. GABIONS & MATTRESSES
4.1 General
If not otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall submit a proposal of the
type and dimension of gabions, the stone fill (type, strength, and grain sizes), the method of
placing and the time schedule for delivery and construction. He shall not commence with the
order and construction of gabions before the approval of the Engineer. The standard type gabion
shall be a flexible hot-dip galvanized gabion of the type and sizes specified below. It is made of
wire mesh of the type and size and selvedge as specified in the following:
The gabion boxes and mattresses shall normally be machine woven rectangular units made from
double twist hexagonal mesh of heavy galvanized mild steel wire. Hand woven gabions shall
only be used with the approval of the Engineer if they can be shown to meet the standards
below.
All edges of the standard gabions including diaphragms, if any, shall be mechanically selvedged
in such a way as to prevent unravelling of the mesh and to develop the full strength of the mesh.
Where irregular-shaped gabions are required they shall be formed by folding standard gabions.
4.2 Type and sizes of gabions
Gabions boxes and mattresses shall be confirmed to the standard of the type and sizes shown in
the table below:
Table 4-1 Details of gabion mattress and boxes
Classi- Mesh Mesh Mesh Selvedge Lacing Basket size Tolerance in
fication type opening wire φ wire φ (binding (L×B×H) m basket size
mm mm ) wire φ
mm
Mattres 6x8 64 mm 2.20 2.70 2.20 (3 - 6) x 2 x ±5% on length
s ±10% (0.17 - 0.3) and width and
±25 mm on
depth
Box 10 x 100 mm 3.00 3.90 2.40 (1.5 - 4) x (1 ±5% on each
12 ±10% - 2) x (0.5 - dimension
1)
4.3 Gabion Basket assembly

The wire baskets shall be bound, tensioned and stitched to contain the rock fill and all openings
closed off to ensure that the rock particles cannot be dislodged.
Gabions shall be assembled by binding the edges together at the selvedges with binding wire.
Binding shall be firmly secured at all corners. The binding shall be in the form of continuous
lacing. The wire shall pass around the selvedges and through each mesh in turn, a double twist
being used at alternate meshes. The gabions has to be hexagonal double twisted at woven
process and provided salvage wire of at least 8 swg at the corners. Wire baskets shall not be
assembled in water.
4.4 Placement of gabion boxes
The foundation for the gabions shall be natural undisturbed common material or a prepared sub-
grade. The sub-grade formation surface shall be cleaned and prepared in accordance with
Specification for Earthworks
Prior to placing the gabion baskets on the ground Terrain 1000 or SI 401 (I) filter cloth shall be
placed between the gabions and the ground. Laps in the filter cloth shall be 0.5 meters.
The base of the basket shall be stretched and anchored by stakes driven into the ground to
ensure that tightness of the mesh is achieved. The intermediate interlocking shall be provided
binding opposite walls with addition wire during 1/2 filling of gabion boxes.
4.5 Rockfill for gabions
Rock fill for use in the gabion baskets shall be from the sources in the site approved by the
Engineer. Individual pieces shall be sound, hard, dense and durable.
Rock fill for gabion mattresses shall be graded in size within the range 90 – 150 mm, but never
more than two-thirds the thickness of the mattress. Rock fill for gabion boxes shall be graded in
size within the range 150 – 250 mm. If there is insufficient larger material, 90 – 150 mm rock fill
may be used in the interior of gabion box compartments, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
In this case the larger material must be placed to at least 250 mm from exposed sides and 200
mm from diaphragms and 150 mm from the base and lid.
4.6 Filling of gabions
Filling of the gabion baskets shall not commence until the basket has been placed in its final
position and wired to all adjoining units. The filling shall be carried out ensuring that the stone is
tightly packed and has a minimum of voids.
Vertical bracing wires shall be provided between the top and bottom wire meshes at nominal 500
mm centers. Each vertical bracing wire shall be pulled through the filling and securely fastened
to the top mesh. Horizontal bracing shall be provided in 1 m deep baskets at 500 mm centers
placed at 1/3 and 2/3 height and shall be fastened when filling has reached the appropriate level.
Gabion baskets shall be filled to a level 25 - 50 mm above their tops, the last 100 mm being with
small rock sizes but still within the ranges specified by Engineer. The basket lids shall be tightly
stretched over the filling and securely bound with binding wire. The top selvedges of baskets
placed and filled under water are to remain above water until completion.
On completion the baskets shall be completely and tightly filled, square, true to dimensions and
correct in line and level.

The measurement and payment of gabion shall be made according to cubic meter of the gabion
filled at position as described in typical design sheet or as described in the layout design
drawings.
5. RIVER DIVERSION AND COFFERDAMS
5.1 Scope of works
The contractor shall be totally responsible for the accurate planning and performance of all works
involved for the river diversion. All construction works shall be in accordance to the instruction of
the Engineer. The respective items for river diversion and cofferdams in the Bill of Quantities
(BOQ) shall be deemed to include the following works.
• Supply, erection, operation and maintenance of a gauging station upstream of weir site
location indicated by the Engineer, including all required survey works.
• Detailed hydraulic and design calculations for the diversion channel and the cofferdams.
• Any temporary access roads / crossings to the construction sites.
• Slope and bottom protection of the cofferdams and the diversion channel.
• Adequate sealing of the cofferdams and diversion channel to an extent to avoid destructive
effects and additional dewatering during construction of the weir and other structures.
• All other required works and materials for the construction, operation and maintenance during
the diversion period.
5.2 Material
Excavation of rock and soil required for the diversion channel will be paid under appropriate
items in the Bill of Quantities according to the profiles approved by the Engineer. The excavated
material shall be stockpiled at approved locations and used as far as suitable for the construction
of the cofferdams and refilling of the diversion channel to the lines and levels shown in the
construction drawings. Unsuitable materials shall be dumped in permanent disposal areas as
5.3 Alternatives
The Contractor is free to propose alternate methods for the flood control and river diversion. For
such alternate methods he shall submit with his tender calculations and drawings sufficiently
detailed to enable the Engineer to verify the suitable of his proposed procedure. The item provide
for the alternative proposal in the Bill of Quantities shall be deemed to include all works required
for the river diversion.
5.4 Removal of Cofferdam
Removal of cofferdams, including dumping/compaction of materials, which shall be placed in
permanent areas as directed by the Engineer or shall be disposed of in any other approved
manner and in such a form that the shapes, grades and or finished surfaces shall be no eroding,
free draining and shall blend with the existing surrounding.
5.5 Payment
Payment for river diversion shall be lumped based on the rate approved in BOQ as single item. It
is deemed that the cost quoted in BOQ includes all sorts design, construction and removal of the
cofferdam and protection works associated with this item.
6. DEWATERING
6.1 General
This specification applies to dewatering during construction of all the structures of the work
including borrow areas and shall include all necessary labor, materials, equipment and auxiliary
works as required. The contractor shall also execute the work, permanent or temporary,
necessary to keep seepage and water under control during the construction periods considered
in this contract.
According to the specification covered by this chapter, the contractor shall design, construct and
maintain, and remove all dewatering facilities and where necessary, channels, trough, drainage
works, inlets gutters and all required works to keep construction areas free of water from
whatever sources. Likewise, in order to remove the water, the contractor shall furnish, install,
maintain and operates all pumps, piping, supports, electrical installations and necessary
accessories to maintain the different works free of water during construction. In addition, the
contractor shall have at his disposal sufficient reserve pumps with a capacity of at least equal to
that of the installed pumps and all required auxiliary equipment. It is clearly understood that the
removal of any amount of water that may be present at any moment and the permanent control
of water and seepage is the entire responsibility of the contractor. The reserve units shall be kept
ready for service when the failure of any of the installed units occurs.
Furthermore, the contractor shall ensure that all drainage water will be eliminated without
causing interference to his own work and that of other contractors operating elsewhere on the
construction site. The dewatering system shall be designed and installed in such a way that
alternations and extensions of the systems during operations are possible.
The contractor shall submit to the engineer, for approval, the detailed planning of the dewatering
systems, but the approval of the engineer of the contractor's dewatering system does not exempt
the contractor from any of his obligations and responsibilities under the present Contract.
In case of emergency the contractor shall furnish and install the adequate dewatering system
immediately also without prior approval by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall consider the possibility of the temporary failure of the electric power service.
He shall install emergency power units with sufficiently capacity to feed the necessary power to
the installed dewatering units at the moment of failure. There shall be neither time extensions nor
additional compensations because of failures in the equipment of services rendered by them
during the execution of the works.
The contractor shall be responsible for personnel addicts and for damages and inconveniences
that may be suffered by his equipment or materials, the equipment and materials of the
Employer, of the executed or in-execution works due to insufficient or inadequate control of
seepage, poor operation, or failure of the dewatering system, insufficient capacity of the pumping
system, lack of reserve units or any other reason imputable to the negligence of the Contractor
or to the poor maintenance and operation of his equipment.
Upon completion of the works the contractor shall remove, in a way satisfactory to the Engineer,
all installations for the dewatering systems, such as cofferdams, sheet piles, pump sumps, pipes,
channels, etc and all other control works are delivered clean and according to the lines and
grades of finished works, as shown on the drawings.
6.2 Dewatering Materials and Equipment
Materials and equipment to be provided by the contractor shall be in good working conditions
and adequate to meet the requirements. Materials which are to be preliminary incorporated in
any structure shall be new and unused, shall be in accordance with accepted standards, and
shall not have been previously used for such purpose as dewatering during construction.
6.3 Execution of Work
6.3.1 General
A working schedule with explanatory reports shall be submitted together with the Tender. This
schedule shall show the quantity, type, capacity, stand by equipment, age, condition,
arrangement, location etc of the proposed equipment.
The schedule and any amendments made there during the life of the contract shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer. The contractor is obliged to inform the engineer immediately of any
symptoms of risk of subsidence of collapse. The safety measures required shall be performed by
the contractor without delay.
6.3.2 Start and Duration of Dewatering

Before proceeding with any dewatering work which in the option of the contractor should be
separately remunerated, the engineer's consent shall be obtained. The duration of dewatering
will be determined according to the agreed construction time schedule and to other factors, e.g.
third party's work which has to be carried out under the protection of this dewatering system.
Pumps operations shall not be stopped either pipes, channels and equipment for dewatering
removed or altered in any way, except with the permission of the Engineer. Until then, the pumps
and dewatering facilities shall be kept in proper working order without any extra payment being
granted.
In the event of power failure, a diesel driven emergency generating set specifically for dewatering
shall be available in addition to the stand by equipment provided under the site installation. This
set shall undergo at least once a week, a trail run lasting thirty minutes.
The costs for mounting and removal of the diesel driven generating set, including all necessary
connections, switches and electrical auxiliaries and controls as well as trial runs shall be part of
the entire dewatering system.
Furthermore, a sufficient number of pumps shall be available on site to meet all requirements of
dewatering in the event of power failure. The cost for the provision, maintenance and operation
of such pumps will be deemed to be covered by the entire dewatering system. Pumps and pipes
may be provided at the option of the contractor but the requirements of dewatering shall be
guaranteed.
The provision of pumps shall include the complete sets of pumps sumps as required, including
sheeting, bracing, etc the installation of electrical connections or the supply of fuel, the disposal
of water and all other elements required to ensure an effective operational system. The pumps
shall be located away from permanent structures wherever possible and in any way the location
shall be agreed upon after consultation with the Engineer.
Supply of lubricants, accessories, spare parts, etc operation and maintenance including all
additional works required for continuous functioning of the dewatering system, transport,
including any intermediate storage, as well as installation and removal of all dewatering
equipment and the sealing of pipes etc shall be included in the lump sum.
Upon completion of dewatering work, all pipes shall be closed off and the pumps sumps shall be
removed and tightly filled by injection of cement mortar or by underwater concreting. These
works shall require the prior approval of the Engineer.
6.3.3 Pumps Sumps and Channels
Provision of pump sumps and channels of dimensions required in each particular case shall
include all necessary excavation of any kind of soil above and underwater, back fill and
consolidation, sheeting, bracing, stiffening, sealing, scaffolding access, as well as the disposal of
water and all auxiliary works.
6.3.4 Precaution to avoid Dewatering
The contractor shall consider all difficulties and additional work due to the presence of water for
the construction of the work.
Where it is possible to keep off divert water without special dewatering arrangements or where
work can be carried out normally under of in water, no payment will be made for dewatering.
Neither more pumping over into another pumps sump nor dewatering work which has been
necessitated as a result of wrong techniques or delays in the construction time schedule and
which is due to the fault of the contractor will not be paid for.
6.3.5 Ready for Service Condition
The contractor shall maintain ready for service and regularly clean all dewatering equipment and
accessories and shall keep all access clear so that they can immediately and safely be used
without risk of accident. Any recommendations made by the Engineer in this matter shall be
followed by the contractor.
6.3.6 Leakage
Block outs and pipe connections through structures and their closure, proper grouting of joints,
etc or repair in the event of leakage shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
6.4 Payment
There is no separate item for the dewatering the water course while doing foundation works
including concreting. The dewatering item, its installation cost, running and maintenance costs
thus has to be loaded in River diversion and shall effect together with the payment of River
Diversion and Cofferdam as a lumped amount as listed and to be quoted in BOQ as a single item
7. CONCRETING MATERIALS
7.1 Cement
7.1.1 Quantity and Type
The cement used in the Works shall comply with NS49/2041 or IS269-1976 or BS12, For the
purpose of cement testing under NS49/2041 or IS269-1976 or BS12, the site shall be deemed to
have a tropical cold climate. The Contractor shall approve the name, brand, date of
manufacturing, and grade before procurement and supply the test certificate accordingly.
7.1.2 Packing
The cement shall be packed in proper bags in approved quality and the net mass of each bag be
50 kg. The permissible tolerance on the mass cement supplied in bags shall be ± 2.5% per bag
with an overall tolerance of ± 0.5% per 10 tones wagon load bags cement.
The cement shall be delivered to the site in good condition and shall be kept dry at all times until
used in the Works. The Contractor shall be responsible for all risks of damage to the cement by
water or otherwise. Defective, damaged or condemned cement shall be removed without delay
from the site.
On delivery at the site, the cement shall be stored in suitable thoroughly dry and well ventilated
sheds with raised timber floors. Each consignment shall be kept separate and suitable labels or
markings shall be made on the bags to distinguish the consignment. Bagged cement shall not be
stacked more than 10 bags high.
7.1.3 Records, Certificates and Samples
Prior to delivery to the site, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer the manufacturer's test
certificate for each consignment of cement received at the site as provided for in clause 10 and
12 of BS 12. When each consignment is delivered to the site, the Contractor shall handover to
the Engineer a statement showing the number of the consignment the name of the manufacturer,
the number of tones in the consignment and the number of bags.
The Contractor shall forward a weekly report to the Engineer giving full particulars of the various
consignments in store.
The Contractor shall maintain a record available for inspection by the Engineer of the locations of
concrete made from each consignment.
The Contractor shall supply samples of cement for test and send them for testing by the
Engineer when requested by the Engineer both from the Contractor's store on site and from the
place of manufacture.
7.2 Aggregates
7.2.1 Supply and Classification
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for procuring, crushing, grading and delivering
aggregate for the Works as required from sources to be approved by the Engineer.
Separate fine and coarse aggregate shall be used for the manufacture of concrete. The term 'fine
aggregate' is used to designate aggregate mainly passing a 5 mm, IS 2386 or BS410 test sieve
and containing only so much coarser material as is permitted for the various grading zones given
in Table 7.3. The term 'coarse aggregate' is used to designate well graded aggregate mainly
passing a 37.50 mm, BS 410 test sieve and only containing much coarser or finer material as is
given in Table 7.2.
Coarse aggregate shall be supplied in the following primary sizes as given in Table below
Table 7-1 Coarse Aggregate
Size Designation Nominal Size
10 5 mm to 10 mm
20 10 mm to 20 mm
40 20 mm to 40 mm
7.2.2 Aggregates shall be graded to produce a workable dense concrete.

All aggregates to be used in concrete shall be clean, hard, dense, sound, chemically inset, or
limited porosity and uncoated particles free from clay or organic matter. Aggregates for concrete
shall comply with BS 882: Part 2 and the following
Grading: in accordance with Table 8.1 and 8.2 herein
Mechanical Properties: when tested in accordance with BS 812, Part3, the 10% fines value,
shall be not less than 50KN.
Silt, clay and Dust Fraction: when determined in accordance with the decantation method
given in NBC101-1994 or equivalent to BS 812, Part 1 the silt, clay and dust fraction by weight
shall not exceed 1% for coarser aggregates, 3% for natural sand or crushed sand and 15% for
crushed sand.
Water Absorption: when tested in accordance with BS 812 Part 2 the water absorption after 24
hours shall not exceed 4%
Soundness: when tested in accordance with the sodium sulphate soundness test specified in
ASTM C88 the aggregate shall have a percentage loss of less than 15.
Alkali - Aggregate Reactivity: When tested in accordance with ASTM C289 aggregate
exhibiting evidence of alkali- aggregate reactivity will not be accepted unless the contractor can
show that the proposed cement aggregate combination, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C227 or other tests, will not produce deleterious alkali-aggregate reactivity, as to which the
Engineer shall be the sole judge.
Shrinkage: when determined in accordance with the BRE Digest 35 test the drying shrinkage
shall not exceed 0.065%.
Mica content: shall not exceed 1% by weight
7.2.3 Testing
Testing of aggregate is to be in accordance with BS 812 or as specified herein.
For each source of aggregate and at least six weeks prior to the preparation of trial mixes
samples of aggregate together with the results of the tests listed below shall be submitted to the
engineer for approval of the sources of aggregate and quality.
Grading analysis to BS 812, Part 1
Mechanical properties 10% Fines Value Test to BS 812 Part 3
Silt, clay and dust fraction in both fine coarse aggregate decantation method to BS 812, Part 1
Specific gravity and water absorption to BS 812 Part 2
Sodium sulphate soundness test to ASTM C88.
Aggregates shall be washed and screened as necessary to produce aggregates meeting the
specified requirements. All such washing and screening shall be to the satisfaction of the
engineer.
If mica be present in unacceptable quantities, its removal shall be effected by techniques
approved by the engineer. The costs of all washing and screening shall be included in the Unit
Rates for Concrete in the bill of Quantities.
7.2.4 Storage
Aggregates shall be stored in separate stockpiles in such a manner that the intermingling of
materials from separate stockpiles or bins is not possible and so as to prevent contamination by
mud, rubbish, windblown dust or vegetation. Aggregate stockpiles shall be provided with
adequate drainage of the aggregates. The storage arrangements shall be to the approval of the
Engineer.
7.2.5 Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregate shall consist of natural gravel, crushed rock or mucks. Friable and flaky pieces
such as mica and shale not be present. Coarse aggregates shall be well graded within gradings
given in Table 7.2 and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Table 7-2 Coarse aggregates percentage by weight passing standard sieves
BS 410 standard Mesh 10 mm to 5 20 mm to 5 40 mm to 5
(mm) mm mm mm
75 100
37.5 100 95-100
20 100 95-100 37-70
10 85-100 30-60 10-40
5 0-25 0-10 0-5
7.2.6 Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand or a mixture of natural sand and crushed gravel or
crushed rock. The engineer will permit the addition of crushed gravel or crushed rock fine
aggregate to the natural sand only where is his opinion it is impracticable to obtain the required
grading otherwise than by such addition.
The grading of the fine aggregate shall lie within one of the grading zones as set out in Table 7.3
below and specified in BS 882.
Table 7-3 Grading zones defined by percentage by weight passing standard sieves
BS 410 Standard Grading Grading Grading Grading
Mesh mm Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4
10mm 100 100 100 100
5mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-00
2.36mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
1.18mm 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
600 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
300 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
150 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15
7.3 Water for Making Concrete

Water used in mixing concrete, mortar or grout shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of
oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials or other substance that may be deleterious to
concrete or steel. The water shall be to the approval of the Engineer and in accordance with
RS3148.
The Contractor shall, at least six weeks prior to the making of the trial mixes, sample the water
he proposes to use and deliver the samples to the Engineer for testing.
7.4 Chemicals in Concrete
The total sulphate content, whether as gypsum or more soluble salts, of the concrete ingredients
when measured as sulphur trioxide shall not exceed 4% of the weight of cement in the concrete.
The chloride content of the concrete ingredients when measured as chloride ion shall not exceed
0.2% of the weight of cement in the concrete.
If instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain samples from the concrete for testing,
all in accordance with BS1881, Part 6. The cost of sampling and transport shall be covered by
the unit rates for concrete.
7.5 Additives
Concrete shall be made from cement, aggregates and water as specified. No other ingredients
shall be mixed with the concrete or mortar without the Engineer's approval.
If the use of retarding or workability agents is approved by the Engineer their use shall be subject
to the following conditions:
There shall be reduction in characteristic strength at 28 days compared with additive free
concrete of the small grade and class.
There shall be no reduction of minimum cement content specified and the use of the admixture
shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions in respect of the conditions at
the site. Admixtures shall be introduced to the concrete by approved dispenser. The Contractor
shall use a retarder to facilitate the preparation of construction joints to the approval of the
Engineer of the composition of the retarder and its methods of application.
8. CONCRETING AND TESTS
8.1 Classes and Grades of Concrete
The concrete used in the Works shall be of the grades or classes shown on the Drawings or
indicated in the Bill of Quantities or approved by the Engineer.
The Table 8.1 shows the tentative use of concrete class in the different structures unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer and/ or shown in the drawings.
Table 8-1 Concrete grades and place of use
Class Use of Concrete

M25(CP25P/40) - Reinforced concrete at structural parts
M25(CP25P/25) - Precast concrete units, operating Slabs
M20(CP20P/40) - Secondary Structures, retaining wall, Guide wall,
Spillways, Drainage networks, sumps, watchman's
Quarter, lining etc.
M15(CP15P/40) - Mass concrete (weir, gravity retaining wall)
M15(CP15P/40) with 30% plum - Weir body (plum concrete)
M10(CP10P/40) - Lean concrete
The characteristics of the mixes of concrete to be used in the various Works shall be as given in
Table 8.2 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Table 8-2 Classification of concrete
M25 M25 M20 M15 M15 M10
Concrete grades 25/40 25/20 20/40 15/40 15/20 10/40
Maximum aggregate size 40 20 30 40 20 40
(mm)
Characteristics 25(255) 25(204) 20(153) 15(153) 15(153) 10(102)
Compressive strength
N/mm2 (kg/sq.cm)
Minimum cement content 340 340 290 140 260 3220
of concrete (kg/cu.m)
Maximum cement content 400 400 400 400 400 400
of concrete (kg/cu.m)
Maximum free water to 0.43 0.43 0.55 0.55 0.60 0.60
cement ratio by weight
8.2 Maximum Sizes of Aggregates to be used
Unless shown on the Drawings or given in the Bill of Quantities, the maximum size of coarse
aggregate in concrete for any part of the Works shall be the largest of the sizes given in Table
8.2, the use of which is practical from the standpoint of satisfactory workability and consolidation
of the concrete. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer to the maximum size of
aggregate for each section of the Works.
8.3 Compressive Strength Compliance
The compressive strength of the concrete shall be based on the compression testing of 150 mm
concrete cubes, made and tested in accordance with BS 1881, Parts 1, 3 and 4 on testing
equipment installed by the Contractor in site laboratory under the supervision of the Engineer.
The compressive strength of the concrete is the value of the cube compressive strength, when
tested at an age of 28 days, below which not more than 5% of results shall fall.
The concrete in the works shall be considered to comply with the compressive strength
requirements specified in Table 8.2 if not more than 5% of the 28 days cube compressive
strength test results fall below the specified characteristic compressive strengths and the
following 28 days cube strength are equaled or exceeded.
Table 8-3 Cube strength compliance values
Concrete Minimum Individual Mean of any four consecutive
grade Cube result cube results
N/mm2 N/mm2
25/40 21.3 25 + 0.82 δ
25/20 21.3 25 + 0.82 δ
20/20 17 20 + 0.82 δ
20/10 17 20 + 0.82 δ
15/49 12.8 15 + 0.82 δ
15/20 12.8 15 + 0.82 δ
10/40 8.5 10 + 0.82 δ
The standard deviation, δ in Table 8.3 shall be determined from the cube results of at least 40
separate batches of concrete for each concrete grade produced on site from similar materials by
the same plant under similar supervision. When 40 cube results are not available standard
deviation for the mix designs shall be taken as shown in Table 8.4:
Table 8-4 Standard deviations for cube test results fewer than 40
Concrete Grade Standard Deviations, N/mm2
25/40 11
25/20 11
20/20 9
20/10 9
15/40 6
15/20 6
10/40 4
The concrete represented by a group of four consecutive test cubes shall include the batches
from which samples were taken to make the first and last cubes in the group of four together with
all the intervening batches. If only one cube result fails to meet the minimum individual cube
strength given in Table 8.3 then the result shall be considered to represent only the particular
batch of concrete from which that cube was taken, provided that the average strength of the
group of four results in which the low cube occurs satisfies the second requirement of Table 8.3.
The action to be taken in respect of the concrete represented by test cubes which fail to meet the
compliance values given in Table 8.3 shall be determined by the Engineer which may range from
qualified acceptance in less severe cases to rejection and removal.
8.4 Water Cement Ratio
The maximum water cement ratios specified in Table 8.2 shall be the ratios by weight of free
water to cement in the mix based on the aggregate being a saturated surface dry condition.
Throughout concrete production the actual water cement ratio shall be strictly monitored and the
batch quantities of aggregates and water regularly adjusted to maintain the design water cement
ratio.
8.5 Workability
Concrete shall be of such consistency that it can be readily worked into the corners and angles
of the formwork and around reinforcement without segregation of the materials or bleeding of
free water at the free surface against formwork. On striking the formwork the concrete shall
present a face which is uniform free from honeycombing, surface crazing, or excessive dusting,
and which shall not, in the opinion of the Engineer be inferior to the specified standards.
Concrete to be placed underwater shall have high workability such that the specified
characteristic strength is achieved without compaction.
Workability of the concrete shall be measured by the slump method of other approved method in
accordance with BS 1881 Part 2 and to the approval of the Engineer.
Concrete workability shall be as low as practical for the placement and workability and shall be
within the limits given in Table 8.5 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Table 8-5 Range of Slump Values (mm)
Kind of Concrete Slump
Precast concrete 10 to 50
Mass concrete and plain concrete 25 to 75

Reinforced concrete 50 to 100
Underwater concrete 100 to 200
8.6 Mix Design
The contractor shall design suitable mixes for each grade of concrete required for the Works as
shown in Table 8.2. Each grade of concrete shall be designed to a target mean strength of a
least as presented in Table 8.6:
Table 8-6 Concrete grades and target mean strength
Concrete grade Target Mean strength
(N/mm2)
25/20 25 + 1.64 δ
25/40 25 + 1.64 δ
20/20 20 + 1.64 δ
20/10 20 + 1.64 δ
15/40 15 + 1.64 δ
15/20 15 + 1.64 δ
10/40 10 + 1.64 δ
For each grade of concrete, well in advance of construction, the contractor shall submit
information to the Engineer for his approval as follows.
(1) full details of tests and trial mixes
(2) the mix designs with the proposed quantities of constituents per cubic meter of fully
compacted concrete and value of workability.
If the cube results are consistently and significantly in excess of the target mean strength then
the contractor may modify the mix proportions provided the requirements hereof are still met and
subject to the approval of the Engineer and any additional trial mixes that may require to be
made.
If the cube results are consistently below the target mean strength then the contractor shall
cease production of the relevant class of concrete, investigate the cause of the relative low
strength and rectify to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.7 Trial Mixes
Trial mix design work may be undertaken by the contractor in the site laboratory of the
contractor. At least five weeks before using any concrete in the Works the contractor shall
produce and test trial mixes for each grade of concrete using the same type of construction plant
and the same materials as proposed for the works. The contractor shall give 24 hours notice of
such trials to enable the Engineer to attend.
For each trial mix of concrete three batches shall be made. Three cubes shall be made from
each batch for testing at 28 days and three cubes made for testing at 7 days.
The trial mix proportions will be approved if the average compressive strength of the nine cubes
tested at 28 days exceed. The average compressive strength of nine cubes for different concrete
grades are shown in Table 8.7.
Table 8-7 Concrete grades and average compressive strength of nine cubes
Concrete grade Average compressive strength of nine
cubes (N/mm2)
25/40 or 20 25 + 1.64 δ - 3.5

20/40 20 + 1.64 δ - 3.5
20/20 20 + 1.64 δ - 3.5
20/10 20 + 1.64 δ - 3.5
15/40 15 + 1.64 δ - 3.5
15/20 15 + 1.64 δ - 3.5
10/40 10 + 1.64 δ - 3.5
The contractor shall not commence placing concrete in the works until the results of the trial
mixes have been submitted and the proposed initial mix designs have been approved by the
Engineer. Once the proportions of the various mixes have been approved, the contractor shall
not vary either the proportions of the mixes or the source of any constituent material without the
approval of the Engineer.
8.8 Concrete Sampling and Testing
Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with BS 1881.
The contractor shall establish a system for regular sampling and testing of concrete to the
approval of the Engineer. Samples shall be taken from randomly selected batches of each class
of concrete used in the works, and at approximately equal intervals throughout the placement.
Where more than one mixer is in use, sampling shall be from each mixer in turn. Rates of
sampling and testing shall generally be as described in Table C.6, but the Engineer may at any
time vary the rate and number. Higher rates of sampling and testing may be used at the start of
the works to establish the quality quickly or during periods of production when quality is in doubt.
The contractor shall provide the necessary equipment, labor and transport for caring out the
sampling and testing in the site laboratory. The concrete test cubes shall be stored and tested at
the site laboratory under the supervision of the Engineer.
Records of concrete sampling and testing shall be kept by the contractor and forwarded to the
Engineer within 24 hours of sampling and testing. Samples for testing shall be taken at the point
of discharge into the works.
Table 8-8 Concrete sampling and testing
Tests Rates of Sampling and Testing
Workability First and second batch from each
Slump test or similar Mixer during any pour and thereafter on every
approved 10th batch and when sampling for each cube
making.
Temperature of fresh At the same intervals as the workability test is
concrete made.
Cubes for compression One cube shall be made at the rates listed below
testing at 28 days but at least one for each day that concrete of
that grade is made.
Concrete Class M25 M20 M15 M10
Each 20 Each 20 Each 50 Each 50
m' or 20 m' m' m'
batches
or 20 or 50 or 50
batches batches batches
Cubes for compression At rates directed by the Engineer's
Tests Rates of Sampling and Testing

testing at 7 days Representative but in any case not exceeding
those required for 20 days cube testing.
Cubes for compression testing at 7 days At rates directed by the Engineer's Representative but
in any case not exceeding those required for 20 days cube testing.
8.9 Ready Mixed or Truck Mixed
Ready mixed concrete may be used only with the approval of the Engineer and shall comply with
all requirements of the Contract.
The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators, operating continuously, or truck mixers,
which shall comply with BS 4251, or similar approved. For each batch of concrete the time of
introduction of cement and water to be aggregates shall be recorded on a delivery return to be
forwarded to the Engineer. Water shall be added either at the delivery point or at the central
batching plant. In no circumstances shall water be added in transit.
Concrete shall be discharged and placed within one hour after the time of loading or other such
time as may be found necessary and approved by the Engineer to ensure that the concrete has
the required workability at the time of discharge and placing. The time of loading shall be the
time of contact between the cement and aggregates or, when these surfaces are dry, between
cement and added water.
A mixer that has been out of action for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before
any fresh concrete is mixed in it. The first batch of concrete materials through the mixer shall
contain an excess of cement, to coat the inside of the drum without reducing the required mortar
content of the mix.
8.10 Equipment for concreting
The Contractor shall provide at the sites of the Work adequate mixing plants with the following
specifications which will permit performance of the concrete work without delay in the approved
time schedule for the Work.
The equipment shall be capable of combining the aggregate, cement, admixture and water into a
uniform mixture within the time limit specified hereafter and of discharging this mixture without
segregation. The complete plant assembly shall include provisions to facilitate the inspection of
all operations at all times. The plant shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
An individual weight batcher shall be provided for each material except the admixture which may
be batched by volume. Adequate facilities shall be provided for the accurate measurement and
control of each of the materials entering each batch of concrete.
The Contractor shall provide standard test weight and any other auxiliary equipment required for
checking the operating performance of each scale or other measuring device. Periodical tests in
accordance with the manufacturer's instruction shall be made in the presence of the Engineer in
such a manner and at such intervals as may be directed by the Engineer.
The plant shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying moisture content
of the aggregate and to change the weights of the materials being batched.
8.11 Transportation of concrete
Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported within one hour to the final position
by means to be approved by the Engineer, which will ensure that the concrete is of the required
workability at the point and time of placing, and which will maintain a continuous delivery of
concrete. All equipment used for this purpose shall be kept clean and in good condition. If
concrete is to be poured by tipping, chutes must be used to keep it coherent, their ends being
just above the placing points.
Pump lines must be laid so that the stream of concrete is not interrupted. Water content and
particle size must be carefully watched when concrete is being pumped to prevent the pipes
being plugged.
The slopes of troughs for conveying fresh concrete shall be chosen so that the concrete with
minimum water content flows in a steady stream without segregation.
8.12 Placing of concrete

No concrete shall be placed until the site of placing including formwork, reinforcement and
embedded items have been inspected and the Engineer has given his written permission for
placing of concrete. Safe access arrangement shall be given for this purpose.
All concrete placed on earth shall be placed upon clean compacted, damp surfaces free from
standing or running water.
Surfaces of rock upon which concrete is to be placed shall be clean and free from oil, standing or
running water, mud, loose rock, objectionable coating, debris, and loose, semi-detached, or
unsound fragments. Faults, fissures and seams shall be cleaned to a satisfactory depth and to
firm rock on the sides. Immediately before concrete is placed all surfaces shall be cleaned
thoroughly by the use of high velocity air-water jets, brooming, wet sand blasting, bush-
hammering, or other satisfactory means including combinations of the above. All installation of
pipes, drains and other installations necessary to produce a foundation free of running or
standing water shall be installed by the Contractor and securely fastened in place so as to
prevent them from being jarred loose by concrete placement. Where gravel drains are used to
control seepage water, the drains shall be covered with low slump concrete which shall be
allowed to reach its final set before placement may begin. No separate payment will be made for
such installations. This complete operation and the extent thereof is subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
All surfaces shall be in a damp condition at the time of placement. All free water shall be
removed prior to the placement of mortar and concrete. All approximately horizontal surfaces
shall be covered by a thin layer of mortar of the approved composition and broomed into the
surface as directed by the Engineer. Concrete shall then be placed immediately upon the fresh
mortar.
In placing concrete through reinforcement, care shall be taken that no segregation of the coarse
aggregate occurs. On the bottom of beams or slabs, where the congestion of steel near the
forms makes placing difficult, a layer of mortar of a composition compatible with the required
concrete strength as directed shall be first deposited to cover the surface to a depth or
approximately 3 cm.
In preparation for the placing of concrete all saw, dust, chips, and other construction debris and
extraneous matter shall be removed from the interior of forms. Struts, stays and braces, serving
temporarily to hold the form in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at
their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering
their service unnecessary.
These temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms and not buried in the
concrete.
Before concreting the forms shall be thoroughly wetted but no excess water shall remain in the
forms,
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all concrete shall be placed in its final position
within 60 minutes of being discharged from the mixer.
Concrete shall not be placed in or in contact with standing or running water unless so specified
or approved. Water accumulating during placing shall be removed. Concrete shall not be placed
against concrete which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a construction joint
is formed as hereafter specified. When stoppage of concreting operations occurs for any reason,
construction joints shall be placed either horizontally or vertically as needed, provided with keys
to resist shear, and dowels to develop bond, as directed by the Engineer.
Before concreting operations are resumed, the surface of the concrete shall be cut or chipped to
remove all laitance and to expose the aggregate. The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly
saturated and coated with a proportion by weight of 1:2 cement mortar if directed by the
Engineer before the placing of the concrete is resumed.
Concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequence indicated on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. It shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall be placed
so as to avoid segregation of the concrete and displacement of the reinforcement, formwork, or
embedded items and brought up in layers not exceeding 40 cm compacted thickness. Placing
shall be continuous between specified or approved construction joints.
For the placing of the check dam bodies selected boulders shall be carefully arranged and
embedded into the dam body concrete one after another by experienced laborers, so as to have
a minimum voids or empty spaces to be filled with concrete class M15 completely. Prior to
setting, the boulders shall be wetted sufficiently to take up its surface absorption, but no boulder
having a film of water on its surface shall be used. Placing and embedding the selected boulders
will be paid separately from concrete class M15 or as stated in the BOQ.
In case of massive structures the lift of concrete should not exceed 2 m or 1 m in the event of
critical temperature, Concrete in adverse weather conditions.
Concrete shall not be dropped freely more than 1.50 m. The design and slope of chutes shall be
to the approval of the Engineer and they shall be kept clean and in good repair. The use of
pneumatic placers and concrete pumps shall be regulated so as to comply with the requirements
of the Specifications.
The time between successive lifts shall be at least 24 hours for all structures. This time may have
to be extended to 96 hours in case of massive structures during critical periods of high internal
heat generator in the concrete. Time limits shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Outdoor concreting shall not be started during raining. If concreting is already in progress, it shall
be suspended if the rain affects the quality of concrete at the judgment of the Engineer.
8.13 Compacting of concreting
The concrete shall be fully compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass to the full extent
of each layer of maximum 50 cm and successive layers shall be thoroughly worked together
without any visible joint. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, approved power driven
vibrators shall be inserted or otherwise applied to ensure that the concrete is fully compacted
throughout. Vibrators shall be operated by experienced laborers only Immersion vibrators, having
head diameters equal to or less than 10 cm, shall have a minimum speed of 7,000 r.p.m. Those
with head diameters more than 10 cm shall have a minimum speed of 6,000 r.p.m. Formwork
vibrators shall operated at no less than 8,000 r.p.m. Immersion vibrators shall penetrate the full
depth of the layer and shall enter the underlying layer, where this is of fresh concrete, so as to
ensure proper integration of successive layers. They shall be inserted at sufficiently close
intervals long enough to ensure proper compaction and shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the
formation of voids. Excess vibration causing segregation, surface laitance or leakage through
formwork shall be avoided. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete or in such a way as to
displace or damage reinforcement or other embedded items or to damage formwork or concrete
already set in position. A spare vibrator of required capacity shall be available and shall be tested
to ensure that it is working, before concreting commences. Where more than three vibrators are
in use, a second spare vibrator shall be available.
When concrete is compacted by hand, it shall be thoroughly rammed and spaded into place and
around reinforcement and embedded parts and the stuttering by an adequate number of
properly-trained men so as to give homogeneous mass and surface finish free from defects.
8.14 Curing and protection of concrete

The strength of freshly set concrete is appreciably increased by careful after-treatment. Freshly
placed concrete shall be protected against sunshine, rain or running water, chemical attack and
vibrations until it hardens and shall then be prevented from drying out in general for at least
fourteen days. This may be done by:
- Moist curing such as spray, for saturated Dunlap, etc. under normal temperatures.
- Covering with a layer of absorbent fabric or a layer of sand kept constantly wet.
- Covering the thoroughly wetted concrete with a layer of approved waterproof membrane kept in
contact with its surface.
- Application (except to surfaces which are to be bonded to subsequent concrete with an
approved liquid curing membrane.
However, the use of membrane curing shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer.
The use of cement other than ordinary Portland cement, special aggregates, or admixtures may
involve modifications of the above requirements and these shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
Concrete shall not be subjected to traffic, vibration, shock or loading until the permission of the
Engineer has been given.
No fire or excessive heat, including the heat resulting from the welding of steel or reinforcing
bars, shall be permitted near or in direct contact with concrete at any time. All conduits and other
openings through the concrete shall be closed during the entire curing period.
Horizontal construction joints and finished horizontal surfaces cured with sand shall be covered
with a minimum uniform thickness of 5 cm of sand which shall be kept continuously saturated.
Exposed concrete surfaces shall be dept more than 5 deg. C by the application of suitable
insulation for at least 14 days immediately after placing during cold season.
8.15 Damaged or defective concrete surface
Defective concrete and concrete damaged from any cause shall be removed and replaced by the
Contractor with acceptable concrete. Irregularities of alignment due to inaccurate finishing of
surfaces, bulging of forms or other defects shall be rectified.
Patching and finishing work shall be done only by skilled or specially trained workmen and shall
be subject to rigid inspection by the Engineer. Before final acceptance of the Work, Contactor
shall clean all exposed concrete surfaces and shall remove all unsightly stains to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
All porous and fractured concrete and surface concrete, to which additions are required to bring it
to prescribed lines, shall be removed by chipping to bare the reinforcing. The extent and
dimensions of the chipped openings shall be directed by the Engineer.
The chipped openings shall be sharp edged and keyed and shall be filled to the required lines
with fresh concrete, fresh mortar or dry pack mortar as directed by the Engineer. Where concrete
is used for filling, the chipped openings shall be not less than 10 cm in depth and the fresh
concrete shall be reinforced and dowelled to the surface of the openings as directed by the
Engineer.
The mortar shall be fresh when placed and any mortar that is not used within two hours after
preparation shall be wasted. Immediately prior to mortar application, the surface to which the
mortar is to be bonded shall be dampened, and then scrubbed with a small quantity of mortar
using a wire brush.
Where repairs are more than 3 cm deep, the mortar shall be applied in layers not more than 2
cm thick to avoid sagging. After each layer, except the last, is placed, it shall be thoroughly
roughened by scratching with a trowel to provided an effective bond with the succeeding layers.
The last or finishing layer shall be smoothed with a trowel to form a continuous surface with the
surrounding concrete; the addition of a small quantity of water to the finished surface of the patch
to aid in securing a smooth finish may be permitted but no other additional water than this shall
be used. All patches on exposed surfaces shall be neat and smooth and as near as possible of
the same color as the adjoining concrete. All patches shall be thoroughly bonded to the surfaces
of the chipped openings and shall be sound and free from shrinkage cracks and dummy area.
All patches and repairs shall be kept continuously damp for a period of not less than 7 days and
kept out of the direct rays of the sun for at least 7 days immediately following completion of the
patch of repair.
All remedial work shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer and without cost to the
Employer.
8.16 Plum Concrete
The selected stone are placed on concrete during casting which should be of designed size, free
of dust, soil and dirt. The stone should be touch each other of the bond between plum concrete
should be intact. The minimum distance between plum and reinforcement bar is 30 cm if
unspecified by the engineer, at site.
Concrete shall be placed in proper parts of the structure only with the Engineer's approval and
full details of the method proposed shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer in advance of
placing.
8.17 Concreting Under water
No concrete shall be placed in flowing water.
Concrete shall be placed underwater only with the Engineer's approval and full details of the
method proposed shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer in advance of placing. The
method of placing shall be in accordance with CP 2004: Foundations.
No concrete shall be placed in position by termite tube, or approved underwater skips.
Underwater concrete shall be placed in single lift; no horizontal joints will be permitted.
Underwater concrete shall not be vibrated and shall be subjected only to the least amount of
disturbance required to place and screed the finished surface. During and after concerning
underwater, pumping or watering operations in the immediate vicinity shall be suspended until
the Engineer permits them to be continued.
The minimum cement contents for concrete placed underwater shall be 360 kg/m3. The
maximum cement content given in Table 8.2 may be exceeded for concrete placed underwater
to the approval of the Engineer.
8.18 Converting in Adverse Conditions
The contractor shall not place concrete in the works.
(1) During heavy rains or dust storms.
(2) When the (shade) air temperature exceeds 38 °C.
(3) When the air temperature is less than 2 °C.
(4) If the temperature of the concrete is less than 4 °C or more than 30 °C without taking
necessary measures to endure acceptable concrete temperatures all to the approval of the
Engineer.
(5) When the (shade) air temperature exceeds 30 °C without taking precautions to the approval
of the Engineer to ensure that maximum internal temperature of the concrete does not exceed 38
°C during the initial test.
(6) When the temperature of the formwork or reinforcement exceeds 30 °C.
8.19 Concrete Curing and Protection

The contractor shall not less than 7 days protect the concrete from the harmful effects of frost,
wind, sun, high and low temperature changes, premature loading, deflection, impact, running
water and aggressive groundwater. Protruding steel shall be kept cool.
All exposed concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously moist for not less than 7 days after
casting, by watering, by covering with hessian or saking which shall be kept fully saturated at all
times or by other methods approved by the Engineer.
Curing membranes approved by the Engineer shall be applied in conformity with manufacturer's
instructions. They shall be applied to un-shuttered surfaces within 1 hour of concrete deposition
and shall incorporate aluminum or other approved reflecting agent. Surfaces with applied curing
membrane shall be shaded from the sun. Curing membranes shall not be used on concrete
surfaces which are to be waterproofed.
8.20 Embedded Items
Before placing concrete, care shall be taken upon the fact that all embedded items are securely
fastened in place as shown in the drawings or otherwise as directed by the Engineer. All
embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free from oil and other foreign matters such as
loose coatings of rust, paint, scale, mortar etc. The embedding of wood in concrete shall be
prohibited unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
Any pipelines or other materials embedded in structures under the Contract, as construction
expedients, shall conform to the above requirements and upon completion of their use, shall be
backfilled with concrete at no extra cost to the Employer.
8.21 Blockouts
Concrete blockouts shall be formed where metalwork and other various items specified under the
Contract are to be installed by the contractor.
Where blockouts are to be made, the concrete surfaces shall be chipped, roughened, cleaned
and kept moist for at least 4 hours. After such surfaces have been approved by the Engineer and
the metal work and such other items as specified above have been installed in position, the
contractor shall place reinforcement (if required) and cement mortar composed of more than 500
kilograms of cement, of concrete of the same type as that specified for the surrounding concrete.
If blockouts are filled with concrete as specified above, care shall be taken on the conditions that
the freshly placed concrete is tightly bonded to the previously placed concrete and that the
complete adhesion between the concrete and all metalwork and other items in the blockouts is
obtained.
The cost of making and backfilling blockouts shall be included in the unit rate of the respective
concrete bed in the Bill of Quantities.
8.22 Concrete for embedded of machine parts
Where the installation of hydraulic, electrical and mechanical equipment is carried out by other
contractors, the Contractor shall place the anchorages, bracket, edges, or any part of thereof
required for embedment or installation as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall place the
reinforcement and concrete and ensure that all voids are properly filled with concrete. The
Contractor shall cooperate with the other contractors in installing equipment and shall place
concrete as introduce by the Engineer after the equipment or any part thereof has been
positioned.
Surface of blockouts, anchor holes, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned from contamination and dust
and so prepared that very tight contact between blockout surfaces and the poured concrete is
obtained.
The whole space must be absolutely filled by fine grained concrete type A as indicated on the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
8.23 Construction joints.

Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the position and
arrangement of which shall be as indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit a drawing with full details of the proposed joints (in addition to those
shown on the Drawings and prescribed by the Engineer) with the shuttering and reinforcement
details involved in sufficient time to enable the Engineer to review the implication of the proposal.
Construction joints in highly stressed parts and in water retaining structures shall be avoided as
much as possible.
The faces of vertical joints shall be shuttered with expanded metal or the rough material. Where
watertight concrete is specified, the expanded metal has to be removed completely before the
adjacent lift is poured.
At exposed faces joints must appear strength vertically or horizontally or lines produced by
templates fixes to the shuttering, under any circumstances unshutterd joints on a slope
exceeding 20% shall not be permitted and feather edges of concrete at joints must be avoided.
Joints shall be located in column at the underside of slabs or beams or at the top of footings and
floors. Column haunches and drop panels shall be concreted with the slab. Joints shall be
perpendicular to the main reinforcement. The upper surface of lifts in walls and columns shall be
horizontal.
When work has to be resumed on a surface which has set, the surface shall be treated as
follows:
- Concrete in place for not more than 4 hours will have a laitance film at the surface with loose
and porous material below it, which shall be carefully removed by the use of dry or wet sand
blasting assisted by a light brushing or by an alternative approved method without loosening or
damaging the body of the concrete. New concrete shall then be placed immediately.
- Concrete in place for more than 4 hours but not longer than 3 days will have a laitance film at
the surface with loose and porous material below it, which shall be removed as above. The
surface beneath this shall be thoroughly washed with clean water. Immediately before the fresh
concrete is deposited, the surface shall be coated with an approx.10 mm layer of cement mortar
of the same consistency as that embodies in the concrete mix if directed by the Engineer.
- Concrete in place for longer than 3 days shall be chipped or wet sand blasted so as to expose
an entire fresh surface of Sound homogeneous concrete without cracks or loosened aggregate.
Immediately before the fresh concrete is deposited slurry of neat cement with consistency of
thick cream shall be well worked into the prepared surface and followed by an approx. 10 mm
layer of cement mortar of the same consistency as that embodied in the concrete mix if directed
by the Engineer.
In the case of permanently visible joints the mortar layer shall be kept 5 cm from the exposed
face. The treatment of the construction joints shall be included in the unit price of concrete.
After being roughened, the surface of the concrete shall be cleaned thoroughly of all loose
fragments, line and other objectionable substances, and in such a condition so as to assure good
bond between the existing and the new concrete. Such surface shall be moistened for at least 48
hours prior to placing the new concrete.
The method used in disposing of waste water employed in cutting, washing and rinsing of
concrete surfaces shall be such that the waste water does not stain, discolor, or affect exposed
surfaces of the structures. Methods of disposal shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
Contraction joint and P.V.C. Water stop
Contraction joint as indicated on the Drawings or the location as directed by the Engineer shall
be treated by the Contractor. The joint material will consist of a layer of bituminous coating or as
instructed by the Engineer on the face of the first concrete.
PVC water stop strip will be placed across the joints which have to remain watertight. The
specifications of water-stop shall be complied with the tensile strength of more than 125
kg/sq.cm and an elongation before rupture not less than 300%. Water stop strips can be glued
together at temperature of about 150 deg. C. Gluing and placing shall be done in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Physical characteristics of the water-stop strips shall confirm
the requirements of IS, Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water-stop, or approved equivalent.
The water-stop strips shall be symmetrical in shape and the dimensions of both types shall be as
follows:
Dimensions (mm) Type A Type B
Width 300 230
Thickness 6 6
Allowance: width ± 5%
Thickness ±10% .
Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, water-stop strips shall be installed with an
approximately equal with of material embedded in concrete on each side of the joint.
All water stops shall be installed and carefully positioned so as to form a continuous watertight
diaphragm in each joint. Adequate provision shall be made to support and completely protect the
water stop in proper position during the progress of the Work, and particular care shall be taken
for their protection during form removal. The Contractor shall replace or repair, at his expense,
any water stop torn, punctured or otherwise damaged before final acceptance of the Work.
Suitable guards shall be provided to protect exposed projection edges and ends of partially
embedded. All spices shall be neat with the ends of the joined materials in true alignment.
Splices in the continuity or at the intersections of runs of plastic water stops shall be performed
by heat sealing the adjacent surfaces in the accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations or as directed by the Engineer. Concrete shall be carefully placed and vibrated
around water stops to ensure maximum concrete imperviousness and density, the complete
filling of the forms in the vicinity of the water stop, and complete contract between the concrete
and all surfaces of the water stop.
The water tightness of joints and structure for which water stops are provided shall be the
contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall supply all materials and labor and perform all the
works necessary to rectify leaking joints and structures to the Engineer's directions and
satisfaction.
8.24 Removal of formwork minimum stripping periods
The removal of formwork is subject to the permission of the Engineer. All forms shall be removed
without damage to the concrete. Before slab forms or scaffolding are removed, the concrete shall
be exposed by removal of the side forms or otherwise as required by the Engineer, to ensure
that it has hardened, and slab form shall in no case be removed until the concrete has reached a
strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of
removal.
Forms shall not be removed before the expiration of the minimum time indicated below, except
as otherwise directed or specifically authorized by the Engineer.
Open Air Structures:
- Supports of beams, frames and wide-spanned slab 336 hrs
- Arches, conduit roofs, beams and deck-type slabs 168 hrs
- Side form of beams 96 hrs
- Columns and walls 72 hrs
- Mass concrete 48 hrs

8.25 Measurement and Payment of Concrete
Measurement for Payment of concrete will be made based on the number of cubic meters of
each concrete type placed within the lines, grade and pay-lines shown on the Drawings, in
accordance with these Specifications, or if approved based on the actual quantities placed.
Unless otherwise stated, no payment will be made for concrete placed outside these limits, and
the measurement shall not include any over break unless recognized as due to geological
conditions.
No measurement will be made for rounded or leveled edges, fillets, scorings chamfers, or space
occupied by metal work, nor for voids or embedded items which are either less than 0.15 cubic
meters in volume or 0.1 square meters in cross section. Measurement will be made for items
with or exceeding the above dimensions. No recesses created by the Contractor for his own
convenience during construction provided they shall be filled as directed.
No measurement for payment will be made for processing and transportation of aggregates,
foundation preparation, surface cleaning and washing, construction joint treatment, including the
mortar applied before placing concrete, repair, architectural features etc., for curing or for hot
weather concreting and the entire cost thereof shall be included in the Contract unit prices stated
in the Bill Quantities.
No measurement for payment will be made for collection of seepage water or water in break from
rock surfaces and diverting it into the drainage systems.
Each month the Contractor shall state in duplicate to the Engineer the amounts of different types
of concrete poured. This statement should be accompanied by a drawing indicating the monthly
progress.
Payment will be made at the respective unit prices of the concrete as stated in the Bill of
Quantities including all cost of aggregate production such as borrowing transporting, crushing,
screening, washing, storing and mixing of aggregate; all costs of batching, mixing transporting,
placing, compacting, surface finishing, curing, protecting, repairing of concrete, all costs of
treatment of construction joints and include also all necessary equipment, tools, labour and any
other items required.
No payment will be made for defective and wasted concrete. Any concrete with the Contractor
places or uses for his own installations or on his own initiative shall be at the Contrator's
expense.
9. SHOTCRETE OR SPREAD CONCRETE
Sprayed concrete may be applied at slope protection in different areas un-reinforced or
reinforced by wire mesh or fiber reinforcement.
9.1 Materials
9.1.1 Cement
Cement for sprayed concrete shall comply with the same quality as mentioned in concreting
9.1.2 Silica fume
Silica fume shall be from a source approved by the Engineer. Silica fume/ water slurry shall be
regularly agitated by circulation pumps prior to use. The optimum content of silica fume shall be
determined during site trials based on the manufacturer’s recommendation.
9.1.3 Aggregates
The nominal maximum particle size shall be 10 mm unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer,
and the grading shall lie within the envelope given in the following table unless otherwise
approved or specified elsewhere.
Table 9-1 Aggregate grading limits for sprayed concrete
Sieve size, mm Percentage passing by weight

maximum minimum
10 100 100
5 100 70
2.36 100 45
1.18 75 30
0.6 50 18
0.3 30 10
0.15 15 5
The grading and moisture content of the individual fractions of the aggregate shall be checked
and recorded daily by the Contractor.
9.1.4 Water
Water for sprayed concrete shall comply with Specification of water quality.
9.1.5 Admixtures
An accelerating admixture may be used where necessary in order to apply the sprayed concrete
successfully or to maintain safe conditions. The objective in adding such an admixture should be
to obtain high early strengths appropriate to the conditions.
The required characteristic values and consistency of delivery to the site shall be agreed in
writing with the manufacturer of each admixture before commencement of concrete spraying.
Storage conditions and usage of admixtures shall comply with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Only liquid accelerators shall be used unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer. Only the
minimum quantity of accelerator necessary shall be permitted in normal spraying operations and
shall be within the limits recommended by the manufacturer. The quantity shall be determined
by site trials subject to a maximum dosage of 6% by weight of cementation material.
Plasticizers and retarders shall only be supplied from manufacturers approved by the Engineer.
Plasticizers and retarders may be used to reduce the quantity of the mixing water and to improve
the pump ability of the concrete. The effects and optimum dosages of plasticizers and retarders
shall be determined by site trials.
Plasticizers and retarders shall be checked regularly for setting time, water reduction and
development of strength as compared with the base concrete.
9.1.6 Fiber reinforcement
Where fiber reinforced sprayed concrete is applied, the wet mix method shall be used. The
content of steel fibers shall be 50-100 kg/m3 with a fiber size ranging from 14 - 30 mm in length
and 0.3 to 0.6 mm in diameter. Only fiber types approved by the Engineer shall be included in
the mix when fiber reinforcement is used.
Fibers shall be stored in dry sealed containers until ready for use and shall be free from
corrosion, oil, grease, chlorides and deleterious materials which may reduce the efficiency of
mixing or spraying processes, or which may reduce the bond between the fibers and the sprayed
concrete.
9.1.7 Mesh reinforcement
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the reinforcement shall comprise a single layer of
welded steel mesh fabric of 4 mm wires at 100 mm centers (or another mesh of equivalent
weight per unit area) or a built up system made from reinforced steel, as agreed with the
Engineer.
9.2 Mix design

The sprayed concrete mix shall be developed in two stages:
• The production of a suitable base concrete
• The production of a sprayed concrete mix from the base concrete
The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer for approval at least one month before
he expects to be called upon to supply sprayed concrete:
a) Proposed mix details including gradings and admixture details
b) Plant details and method of operation.
The mixes for sprayed concrete shall lie within the following limits:-
Contents of sprayed concrete
Cement content 300 – 450 kg/m3
Silica fume 10 – 15 % by weight of cement
Aggregate/cement ratio 3.0 - 5.0
Water/cement ratio 0.35 - 0.45
Characteristic strength 27 N/mm2
In determining the water/cement ratio, account shall be taken of the water content of aggregate.
Water shall be added in sufficient quantities to minimize rebound while simultaneously avoiding
any sloughing of the sprayed concrete during placing.
Where the use of an accelerating admixture is agreed to be necessary in order to apply the
sprayed concrete successfully or to maintain safe conditions, the amount used shall be within
limits recommended by the manufacturer. The objective in adding such an admixture should be
to obtain high early strengths appropriate to the conditions.
9.3 Testing
The 28-day strength is that of 100 mm diameter cores 70 - 80 mm long. If an alternative method
of sampling is used by the Contractor equivalent 28 day strength is to be agreed with the
Engineer. The target mean strength for the base concrete shall be 1.3 times the characteristic
strength for the sprayed concrete.
9.4 Shotcrete Method
9.4.1 General
Sprayed concreting shall be carried out by experienced operators only. The wet mix method shall
generally be used. The dry mix method shall only be used with the approval of the Engineer.
9.4.2 Preparation and approval
The surfaces to which sprayed concrete is to be applied are to be barred down of all large loose
material and the area cleaned down with a mixture of water and air applied at high pressure.
Where the inflow of groundwater renders the surface too wet for the normal application of
sprayed concrete, the Engineer may require that the water be suitably drained before shotcreting
commences so that the surface is free of running water. The Engineer will determine the extent
to which grouting may be necessary to reduce water inflow to acceptable limits, and shall
approve the routing of drains which may be necessary to dispose of the water. Alternatively the
Engineer may, if approval is requested, permit the use of accelerator.
All surfaces to receive sprayed concrete shall be moist but free of all traces of dirt, oil, rebound or
other deleterious material.
Where sprayed concrete is to be placed over a previous layer, that layer shall first be allowed to
reach its initial set and then cleaned of all laitance, rebound or other loose material by brooming
or sluicing to the approval of the Engineer.
Sprayed concrete shall not be applied to any surface without the approval of the Engineer.
Where rock conditions require that sprayed concrete be carried out urgently the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer, so that he may examine the freshly exposed rock and order immediate
application of sprayed concrete if considered necessary, in which case it shall be applied within
four hours and where applicable before drilling for explosives.
9.4.3 Mesh reinforcement
Where directed, steel mesh reinforcement shall be fixed before application of the sprayed
concrete. The steel mesh shall be securely fixed at maximum centers 100 mm both ways at the
optimum distance from the rock face for the application process such as to minimize rebound
and prevent voids. The minimum cover between the reinforcement and the exposed face of the
sprayed concrete shall be 30 mm or greater cover if ordered by the Engineer. Laps shall be 250
mm minimum (or two times mesh spacing whichever is the greater) for mesh. For steel bars the
minimum lap shall be 50 diameters. Where possible the steel mesh shall be placed over a first
layer of sprayed concrete and fastened to the surface with dowels.
9.4.4 Equipment
All the equipment used for the application of sprayed concrete shall be of approved design and in
proper working order. Water needed for the process is to be clean, chemically satisfactory and
supplied at the steady pressure of 4 bar. Air for the equipment is to be clean, dry and oil free
and to be provided at the equipment within pressure range 4 to 7 bar.
9.4.5 Batching
Materials shall be batched by weight unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer and cement
shall not be added more than 1 hour before the anticipated time of placing the sprayed concrete.
9.4.6 Placing
There shall be no significant inclusion of rebound in the finished work, no hollow areas, good
adherence to the rock and a reasonably smooth surface finish. Rebound shall be kept clear of
sprayed concrete being placed and an air jet shall be provided for this purpose.
The Contractor shall prove the layer thickness to the Engineer by probing, depth pins or other
approved means. Construction joints in the layer shall be formed at 45° to the face and
precautions shall be taken to prevent weak and unsightly edges at construction joints. If
necessary, timber strips may be temporarily fixed in place to give a neat, strong edge. Before
placing the adjoining work the edge shall be cleaned and thoroughly wetted.
Before the succeeding layer is placed the existing work shall be checked for hollow or non-
adhering areas and these shall be cut out and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The described thickness shall be an average thickness, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Minimum thickness shall be 60% of described thickness and thickness of more than 2
times the described thickness counts as only 2 times the described thickness in calculation of
average thickness.
9.4.7 Curing
For above ground applications the sprayed concrete shall be sprayed with an approved curing
compound or kept moist continuously for 7 days. Spraying with a fine mist of water is to be
anticipated at intervals not exceeding four hours.
9.4.8 Test panels
Sprayed concrete shall only be carried out by experienced operators or under their immediate
supervision. When required by the Engineer, each crew shall demonstrate their proficiency by
producing test panels before beginning production work.
At least two weeks before he expects to produce any sprayed concrete for inclusion in the
Permanent Works, the Contractor shall prepare not less than three test panels for each mix for
testing. The methods for carrying out test panels and taking samples for strength testing shall be
agreed on site between the Contractor and Engineer.
All the panels shall be a minimum thickness of 80 mm or as directed by the Engineer and shall
be placed in the presence of the Engineer's Representative. When the final set has taken place
samples shall be taken from the test panels and transported to the laboratory where the crushing
strength of the samples will be determined. No trial strength shall fall below the minimum
specified for each design grades
During sprayed concrete operations, routine test panels shall be prepared beside the application
zones for the purpose of quality control. Three panels shall be supplied for approximately each
1000 m2 of sprayed concrete and shall be tested as described above.
The quality of the sprayed concrete will be considered satisfactory if every test result is at least
80 percent of the specified characteristic strength and if at least 80 percent of all results exceed
the specified characteristic strength.
9.4.9 Core cutting
Core cutting shall be carried out at the surface of sprayed concrete for testing its strength and
thickness of the layers. The Contractor shall be requested for core cutting and testing if Engineer
likes to confirm the quality and quantity of the sprayed concrete that is already in place.
9.4.10 Measurement and Payment
Measurement of sprayed concrete for payment will be made only to the neat lines of the
structures as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. In measuring sprayed
concrete for payment, the rates shall be the unit rate per square meter of area for different
defined thickness. Appropriate percentage (10 %) of rebound volume shall be allocated for the
payment of sprayed concrete either un-reinforced or reinforced which shall be determined by
engineer from the field judgment.
The wire mesh shall be measured and payment be made as per weight of the bars placed in the
sprayed concrete in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Payment for
furnishing and placing wire mesh will be made at the unit rate per metric ton which unit rate shall
include the cost of furnishing reinforcement bars, and making the mesh, if used, and of
delivering, unloading, hauling, storing, cutting, bending, cleaning, placing and securing
maintaining in position all reinforcement bars, as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
10. FORMWORK
10.1 General
Forms shall be simple, they shall be rigidly constructed of approved materials and shall conform
to be shapes, lines and dimensions shown in the drawings. Forms shall be braced and shuttered
to withstand the pressure resulting from placing and vibrating the concrete, constructional loads,
wind and other forces without appreciable deformation.
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer, before commencing construction, a set of forms
complying with the above requirements, but such submission to the Engineer or approval by him
shall not relieve the Contractor of any his responsibilities under the Contract for successful
completion of the structure.
Surfaces of the forms to be in contact with concrete shall be free from adhering foreign, matter,
projecting nails and the like, grooves, splits or other defects. Shuttering boards shall be carefully
jointed and so arranged as to be able to swell under the influence of humidity of the concrete,
without causing any deformation to the forms, interstices shall be properly filled with glazier's
putty and the waterproofing of the form shall be sufficient to prevent escape of cement resulting
from excess of water in the concrete. However, the use of paper tamping shall be strictly
forbidden.
Openings (if required) for inspection of the inside of the forms and for removal of water used for
washing down shall be provided and so formed as to be easily closed placing the concrete.
Scaffoldings (if required) shall be firmly constructed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No
separate payment will be made for scaffoldings unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Before placing any concrete, all bolts and the like (if required and which are to be built in) shall
be fixed in their correct positions, and cores and other devices for forming holes, openings, shall
be fixed to the forms. No holes shall be cut in any concrete unless approved by the Engineer.
The use of wire ties for supporting the forms shall not be permitted in concrete walls which are to
be subjected to water, or when the finished surface required as determined by the Engineer is to
be permanently exposed wire ties used for other concrete works shall be cut off flush with the
concrete surface, after the forms are removed. In case embedded metal rods are used for
holding form, the rods shall terminate not less than 3 centimeters from the formed surfaces of the
concrete in which the maximum size of aggregate is 40 millimeters.
Non-staining commercial oil or other approved materials shall be applied to the faces of the
forms before concerning to prevent adherence to the concrete. Care must be exercised to
prevent the material applied to the faces of the form from coming in contact with the
reinforcement, but if this should inadvertently occur, the reinforcement must be cleaned.
When forms have been built and have been prepared ready for concreting, they will be inspected
by the Engineer and no concrete shall be placed until the forms have been approved by him. In
order to avoid delays in obtaining approval, the contractor shall inform the Engineer, at least 24
hours in advance, of his intention to have the forms ready for inspection.
10.2 Removal of Forms
The Contractor shall take full responsibility to that the time span has elapsed for the concrete to
attain sufficient strength before forms are removed. Nevertheless, the forms shall not be stuck
without the prior approval of the Engineer, and in any case at least three (3) days shall elapse
before forms are struck.
Connections shall be so formed as to permit the easy removal of the forms without hammering
and without the necessity of levering against the surface of the concrete.
10.3 Measurement and Payment of Formwork
Measurement of formwork for payment will be made only for the forms which have been used on
the approval of the Engineer. Payment for formwork measured will be made at the unit rate per
square meter. The unit rate shall cover the cost of furnishing all labours, equipment and
materials, erecting and removing the forms and scaffoldings and also the cost of all necessary
work connected therewith.
11. REINFORCEMENT STEEL
11.1 General
Reinforcement steel shall consist of round deformed bars rolled from new billet stock, and shall
confirm to the requirements of the appropriate standards referred to Clause hereof. Steel shall
have a tensile strength of 49 to 63 kg/mm2 and a minimum yield point of 30 kg/mm2. A cross
section of any bar to be delivered shall be exact shape and have the specified diameter at any
point of the bar. The average diameter of 20 bars which are to be selected at random free
shipment of the same size shall not be bigger or smaller by 2 percent than the specified
diameter. Bars shall be free of scale, oil, dirt and structural defects.
When required by the Engineer, the contractor shall submit three copies of mill sheets of steel
bars issued by the iron and steel works for the approval of the Engineer before each shipment,
and inspection at site will be made by the Engineer in accordance with the specification and the
above mill sheets.
11.2 Placing Reinforcement Steel
The number, size, form and position of all reinforcement steel bars, fabric, ties, links, stirrups and
other parts of the reinforcement are to be placed in exact accordance with the drawings and kept
in the correct position in the forms without displacement during the process of vibrating, tamping
and ramming the concrete in place. The Contractor shall provide all necessary distance pieces
and space bars at his own cost to maintain the reinforcement the correct position.
Any ties, links or stirrups connecting the bars shall be bent so that the bars are properly braced,
the inside of their curved parts shall be in actual contact with the bars around which they
intended to fit. Bars shall be bound together with the best black annealed mild steel wire which is
subject to the Engineer's approval, and the binding shall be twisted tight with proper pliers. The
free ends of the binding wire shall be bent inwards.
Before any steel reinforcement is embedded in the concrete, any scale, loose rust, oil, grease or
other deleterious matter shall be removed. Partially set concrete which may be adhered to the
exposed bars during concreting operations shall likewise be removed.
When the reinforcement has been placed and is ready for concreting it will be inspected by the
Engineer and no concrete shall be placed until the reinforcement has been approved by him. The
contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of his intention to have the
reinforcement has been approved by him. The contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 24
hours in advance of his intention to have the reinforcement ready for inspection.
11.3 Cover to Reinforcement Steel
The concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide any necessary cement pads for enduring that cover is
attained and in no case may the use of timber packing be permitted.
11.4 Preparation of Reinforcement Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare at his own expense all details reinforcement drawings. The
drawings shall include all bar placing drawings, bar bending schedules, bars lists, and any other
reinforcement drawings as may be required to facilitate fabrication and placement of
reinforcement bars.
Reinforcing drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Reinforcing drawings and
bar lists prepared by the Contractor shall conform to the standard practices of the industry.
11.5 Measurement and Payment of Reinforcement Steel
Measurement for payment of furnishing and placing reinforcement bars will be made only for the
weight of the bars placed in the concrete in the accordance with the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. Payment for furnishing and placing reinforcement bars will be made at the unit rate
per metric ton which unit rate shall include the cost of furnishing reinforcement bars, and
attaching wire ties and metal supports, if used, and of delivering, unloading, hauling, storing,
cutting, bending, cleaning, placing and securing maintaining in position all reinforcement bars, as
shown in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
No separate measurement and payment will be made for the reinforcement bars placed in pre-
cast concrete items of which unit rates include the cost of reinforcement bars.
12. PRE-CAST CONCRETE
12.1 General
The Contractor may manufacture the pre-cast concrete unites at the site with an approval of the
Engineer in accordance with the Specifications. All materials to be furnished and used for pre-
cast concrete units by the Contractor shall be approved by the Engineer. Forms or molds of
concrete units shall confirm to the shapes, lines and dimensions as shown on the Drawings or
may be directed by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall submit details of the form or mold
proposed for the approval of the Engineer.
12.2 Precast Construction Alternatives
Pre-cast construction may also be employed for structures, other than above units, of such
dimensions and function for which such construction would be suitable.
Should the Contractor wishes to employ pre-cast construction, in such cases he shall submit to
the Engineer full details in writing of his proposals including all proposed modification to
thickness of concrete section, concrete specification and reinforcement to suit such construction,
and his proposed methods of handling and bedding pre-cast units and backfilling to the same,
etc. The Engineer may approve such proposal with or without modifications, and Contractor will
be paid for such pre-cast units as if constructed to the details on the Drawings.
12.3 Pre-cast Concrete Units
Pre-cast concrete units to be manufactured at the site shall be of concrete with adequate
strength for bearing loads as directed by the Engineer.
Mould for the pre-cast concrete shall be of steel construction. The Contractor shall submit details
of the mould to the Engineer for his approval.
The concrete units shall be cast in horizontal position, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
The concrete shall be placed continuously in each of these units and compacted by vibrating in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer. Special care shall be exercised in tamping and vibrating the
concrete so as not to displace the reinforcement.
The concrete units shall remain in their molds for three (3) days before being stripped, during
which time the exposed face shall be covered with sacking or matting and kept constantly wet. In
addition, the sides of the forms or molds shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun. After
removal of forms or form of the moulds, the units shall be kept moist continuously for a minimum
period of eleven (11) days. After stripping, such units as piles, slabs, panels etc shall be stacked
for a period of not less than thirty (30) days, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, so as the
leave a free air space between each of these pre-cast units. Each of such pre-cast units shall be
clearly marked with the date of casting, if prescribed by the Engineer.
Precast units shall also be paid according to cubic meter as that of concrete PCC rate of the
grade. Such precast units are basically deemed to be same as cast in Situ and shall comply
weight limit, and can be handled without machine and due care in order to regard same as
concrete on slab and covers.
13. CEMENT MORTAR
13.1 General
A mortar consisting of a mixture of Portland cement, sand and water shall be used as required by
their specifications for brick works, pointing, plastering, wet rip rap and masonry for which mortar
is required. Surface to become in contact with mortar shall be cleaned thoroughly of all loose
materials, dirt and other contaminations.
13.2 Composition of Mortar
The mortar mix shall contain the proportion of cement to sand or fine aggregates as prescribed in
the applicable clause in which mortar is used. The water/cement ratio of the fresh mortar in place
shall be approximately 0.55.
13.3 Mixing
The mortar shall be thoroughly mixed for a period of not less than one and half minutes. Mixed
material that stands longer than an hour shall be rejected for use.
13.4 Equipment
The equipment and tools used for mixing and placing shall be of an Engineer’s approved type
and sufficient capacity to perform the work.
13.5 Placing, Curing and Payment
The application of the mortar shall be done by experienced personnel with proper workmanship.
Water curing may be discontinued after ten (10) days unless otherwise specified. No separate
payment will be made for mortar described above except in case of plastering and the costs shall
therefore be included in the work items in the Bill of Quantities for which mortar is required as
binding agent.
14. JOINT SEALING

14.1 Scope
Under these items, the contractor shall furnish and install water-stops of polyvinyl-chloride in the
shape and dimensions as specified and in the locations as shown on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. For convenience of placement in forms, a water-stop utilizing a split flange may
be used; however, prior to placement of final concrete or mortar can enter between the two split
portions of the flange.
Two kinds of water stops, 230 mm wide and 150 mm wide, shall be used depending on the
magnitude and importance of the works as designated on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
14.2 PVC Water stops
14.2.1 Scope
Under these items, the contractor shall furnish and install water-stops of polyvinyl-chloride in the
shape and dimensions as specified and in the locations as shown on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. For convenience of placement in forms, a water-stop utilizing a split flange may
be used; however, prior to placement of final concrete or mortar can enter between the two split
portions of the flange.
Two kinds of water stops, 230 mm wide and 150 mm wide, shall be used depending on the
magnitude and importance of the works as designated on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
14.2.2 Workmanship
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and electric energy required for making field
splices and installing the water stops. Field splices for water stops shall be made by cutting the
water stops as required, heating the ends to the melting point and jointing them to form the
desired splice ends shall be made by means of the splicing machine recommendation by the
watestop's manufacturer or by any other approved electric heating device.
Care shall be taken in installing the water stops to ensure that the centers of the water stops
coincide at the joints. The Contractor shall suitably support and protect the water stops during
the progress of the Works.
14.2.3 Material Properties
The PVC water-stops shall be fabricated from virgin polyvinyl chloride, contain no reclaimed or
scrap material. The material shall be fabricated and cured in such a manner that any cross
section will be dense, homogeneous and free from porosity and other imperfections.
Water stops shall be manufactured by extrusion process from an electrometric plastic compound,
the basic resin of which is hundred (100) percent polyvinyl-chloride (PVC). The product shall be
dense, homogeneous and free from holes and other imperfections.
The water stops as described herein shall have the following physical properties:
Specific gravity : 1.33 ± 0.33 at 23 °C
Tensile strength : 1.55 to 176 kg/cm at 23 °C
Ultimate elongation : 360% to 400% at 23 °C
Brittleness : - 48 °C
Durometer : 65-75
The PVC materials, when tested in accordance with the relevant Standards, shall have the
physical properties mentioned there under.
The water-stops shall be installed so that they are securely held in their correct position during
the placing of the concrete, which shall be fully and correctly compacted around the water-stops
so that no voids or porous areas are let. Where reinforcement is present, adequate clearances
between it and all water-stops shall be left to permit proper compaction of the concrete. A no has
shall be made through any water-stops. Jointing other than welding shall not be permitted.
- Physical Properties of Polyvinyl Water-stops tests shall be carried out at 250oC.
- Durability : Unchanged by oil, river water, and solar
radiation
- Impermeable : Free of pores and cracks
- Tensile Strength (min.) : 140 kp/cm2
- Elongation at break (min) : 285%
- Hardness Degree (Shore) : 42-52 ShA
- Water absorption total immersion
in distilled water for 48 hours
at 500C(in% by weight) : 0.6%
- Cold Crack Temperature not : -250C
Higher than :
- Accelerated against Test
Retention of initial tensile strength : 85% (minimum)
Retention of initial elevation at break : 85% (minimum)
- Stability in Effect of Alkali Test
Weight gain after 7 days : 0.25% (maximum)
Weight gain after 30 days : 0.40% (maximum)
14.3 Rubber Water stops
14.3.1 General
Whenever possible, complete waters top systems shall meet the specific requirements of the
Work and ensure easy and economical placement with minimum joining up on site.
Dumb-well Water stops will be suitable for partial contraction joint and construction and partial
contraction joggle joints, i-e, joints where no differential movements is permitted and planer
movement is only by construction.
Center Bulb Water stops may be used where it is necessary to accommodate various degree of
planar and differential movement in joints and expansion joggle joints.
The appropriate width of water stops shall depend upon the thickness of the concrete, the size of
the aggregate and the position of the reinforcement. The following rules shall be applied to
ensure a satisfactory selection:
- The overall width of the water stops shall not be greater than the thickness of the concrete
into which it is cased.
- The distance from the face of the concrete to the waters top shall not be less than the width
of the waters top.
- To obtain satisfactory compaction, the width of waters top shall not be less the largest
aggregate size.
- The waters top shall not be positioned closer to any reinforcement member than a distance
equal to twice the size of the largest aggregate, in order to avoid unsatisfactory compaction.
Where expansion joints are concerned, the maximum width of the joint shall be added to the
figure by applying the above rules.
14.3.2 Material Properties

The rubber water stops shall be fabricated by moulding or extruding with integrals cross sections
as shown on the construction drawings. The materials shall be fabricated and cured in such as
manner that any cross section will be dense, homogeneous and free room porosity and other
imperfections.
Minor surface defects such as surface peel covering less than 6.5 cm2, flow lines less than 0.16
cm deep, and non-fills and air traps less than 0.64 cm in longest dimension and less than 3 such
defects shall occur in any 1.5 m length of water stops. Any defects, which do not meet the above
tolerance, shall be either repaired to the satisfaction of the engineer or removed from the finished
product by cutting out the defective length and splicing. Water stops other than special sections
shall be furnished in continuous un-spliced minimum lengths of 15 m.
Rubber for the water stops shall be high grade, thread type compound. The basic polymer shall
be natural rubber, synthetic rubber of a blend of both. The rubber, when tested in accordance
with the relevant Standards shall have the physical properties mentioned herein under.
Gum rubber and rubber cement shall be suitable for making field connections in rubber water
stops
The Contractor shall furnish connection plates, bolts, nuts and washers for field splicing of rubber
water stops, and metal seals with rubber water stops as required by the Engineer.
Except as otherwise specified, all field splices and intersections of rubber water stops and metal
seals shall be made as shown on the construction drawings so as to provide watertight
connections. For bolted connections, contact surfaces shall be buffed and coated with rubber
cement. Where necessary to remove bulbs cutting shall be performed carefully. Vulcanized field
splices will not be required. Intersections of rubber water stops may be furnished as factory
molded special sections. Field splices in rubber water stops including filled intersections of
rubber water stops for which special sections are not available may be chemically bonded using
an approved type of seal splice in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Suitable
support and protection shall be provided during the progress of the work to prevent damage,
deterioration or warping of the water stops. The water stops shall be installed with approximately
an equal width of the material embedded in the concrete on each side of the joint. The concrete
shall be carefully placed and vibrated around the water stops and a complete contact between
and all surfaces of the water stops. In the event that a water stop is installed in the concrete on
one side of a joint more than two weeks prior to the scheduled date of placing the concrete on
the other side of the joint, the exposed water stop shall be covered to protect it from the solar
radiation.
No rubber water stop shall be shipped from the factory until certified tests reports of the rubber
water stop have been submitted to and approved by the Engineer. Rubber water stop shall be
stored so as to limit free circulation of air about the rubber and shall be protected from contact
with oil or grease.
Physical Properties of Rubber Water stops
Durability : unchanged by oil, river water and solar
radiation; impermeable: free of pores and crack
Tensile strength (min) : 210 kp/cm2
Elongation at break (min) : 500%
Hardness Degree (Shore) : 60-50 shA tolerance
Compression set by Const. Deflection Method : max.% of original deflection 20%
Water absorption after 48 hrs at 70o(% by wt) : 0.6%
Accelerated Aging Test:
(48 hours at 70 degree centigrade and 21 kp/cm2 of oxygen pressure)
Retention of initial tensile strength : 75% (minimum)

Retention of initial elongation at break : 75% (minimum)
All joints shall be internal waterproofing and shall be provided with rubber water stops jointed to
metallic strips by vulcanization. Joints between monoliths shall be provided with surface water
stops which shall be water tight fixed to galvanized steel strips by means of galvanized bolts.
Measurement for payment for water stops shall be made for the length in meters of water stops
in place measured along the centerline of the water stops in accordance with the Drawings.
Payment for water stops, 230 mm wide and 150 mm wide, shall be made at the respective unit
rates per linear meter which unit rate shall include all costs of furnishing and placing the water
stops as described above.
14.4 Metal Seals
Metal seals shall be made from corrosion-resisting copper or steel, hot or cold -rolled finish, as
called for in the construction drawings.
Nails and welding rods shall be of type and composition approved by the Engineer for nailing and
welding the corrosion-resisting metal seals as specified.
The contractor shall supply and place all metal seals as shown on the drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish washers and nails for fastening the seals to the forms
land materials for welding metal seals.
The seals shall be joined carefully together by welding so as to form continuous watertight
diaphragms in the joints. Adequate provisions shall be made to support and protect the seals
during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall replace or repair as directed by the
Engineer, any metal seeks punctured or damaged. Damaged of type, shape and joint
connections of the seals and splicing of metal seals to rubber Water stops shall be in accordance
with the Construction Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
14.5 Dowel Bars
In the contraction joint, dowel bars shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. The dowel bars shall be of straight plain round steel bars as approved by the
Engineer.
A half length of dowel bar shall be covered by PVC house or pipe or other approved materials to
prevent bond and shall be placed at intervals shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The other half shall be bonded firmly on one side of joint.
Measurement for payment of dowel bars shall be made for the design weight of bars actually
placed in the concrete at contraction joint in accordance with the Drawing or as directed by the
Engineer. Payment for dowel bars shall be made at the unit rate per kilogram which unit rate
shall include all costs of furnishing and placing, dowel bars as stipulated above including
furnishing and providing cover materials such as PVC house, tube or pipe.
14.6 Joint Filler
Joint filler shall be resin bonded cork such as Expedite 'Hydrocor' or similar approved. It shall be
obtained from manufactures approved by the Engineer and shall be stored and fixed in
accordance with the manufactures approved by the Engineer and shall be stored and fixed in
accordance with the manufacturers approved by the Engineer and shall be stored and fixed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Resin bonded cork filler shall comply with US Federal Specification HH-F-341e Type II Class B
with the following limitation when tested in accordance with the said Specification:
- the load required to compress the material to 50% of its thickness shall be more than 0.035
N/mm2 and less than 0.35 N/mm2
- the recovery after compression to 50% of the original thickness shall be not less than 95% of
the original thickness.
The Contractor shall supply the manufacturer's test certificates for each consignment of each
type of joint filler delivered to site if requested supply sufficient of each type and consignment for
confirmatory tests to be carried out in accordance with the appropriate standard test procedure.
Measurement for payment of joint filler shall be made for the surface area in sq.m. of joint in
accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Payment for joint filler shall be
made at the unit rate per sq.m.
14.7 Joint Sealant
Joint sealer shall be Expanditite 'Thioflex 600 grey gun grade', or similar approved. It shall be
obtained from manufacturers approved by the Engineer and shall be used is accordance with the
manufacturers' instruction inclusive of the supply and application of any priming materials. An
approved bond breaker shall be supplied for placing between the sealant and the joint filler.
The Contractor shall supply the manufacturer's test certificate for each consignment of each type
of joint sealer to the site and shall if required supply sufficient of each type and consignment for
confirmatory tests to be carried out in accordance with appropriate test procedure.
Measurement for payment of joint sealer shall be made for weight of sealer in kilogram actually
placed in the joint in accordance with the drawings or as erected by the Engineer.
14.8 Bitumen Joint Coating
Bitumen for coating concrete joints shall be a straight bitumen, grade 40/50 penetration or other
approved by the Engineer. No separate payment will be made for bitumen. It shall be included in
unit rates of concrete in the Bill of Quantities.
14.9 Anchor Bars
Anchor bars shall be placed at joint between old concrete of existing structures and new
concrete as designed in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
A hole of designed diameter and depth shall be drilled on the old concrete by approved method.
Then a deformed steel bar of designed size shall be inserted at the center of the hole and the
void around the steel bar shall be grouted with a mortar of one part of cement and two parts of
sand in volume.
Measurement for payment of anchor bar shall be made for the weight of bars actually placed in
accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Payment for anchor bar shall be
made at the unit rate per kg which unit rate shall include all cost of furnishing and placing anchor
bar as stipulated above including cost of drilling hole, and furnishing and grouting mortar.
15. STONE WORKS
15.1 Stone Quality
Stones used for stone works shall be carried from the rivers or crushed rocks as approved by the
Engineer. The stones shall have a specific gravity of not less than 2.5, and shall be free from
seams and other defects, and shall be hard, sound and durable.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, flush pointing is required for stone masonry and wet
stone masonry.
15.2 Stone Masonry
Stone masonry will be used for construction of retaining wall, piers and abutment of bridge.
The stones shall be approximately uniform size so that these have no large voids or gaps among
stones when placed. Maximum size of the stones shall be two-third of the wall thickness.
The stone masonry shall be neatly constructed by hand and the stones shall be struck and
consolidated by steel hammer to assure that each stone is thoroughly enveloped in mortar and is
in complete liaison with mortar in all faces. Joints among boulders shall not be so narrowed, but
not exceed 4 cm.
Mortar for stones masonry shall be of a cement/sand ratio of one part of cement and four parts of
sand in volume if unspecified in special cases. The mortar ratios shall confirm 18.2
Joints among stones on exposed surface of stone masonry shall be neatly finished by pointing in
the manner that the mortar in the joints shall be scrapped out by 4 cm in depth and entirely
cleaned up with a mortar of one part of cement and two parts of sand in volume. All the exposed
surface of stone masonry shall be cleaned up all surplus mortar upon completion of the pointing
operation.
If directed by the Engineer, plastering shall be given on crown or top surface of stone masonry.
The plastering method and workmanship are same for brick work or as directed by the Engineer.
Where and when new stone masonry is jointed to the old masonry the mortar in the joint portions
shall be removed to a depth of 5 cm and the removed surface shall be brushed and washed until
perfect clean and sufficient asperities appear to assure good bond between the two masonries. A
layer of cement slurry shall be applied to continue such joint.
Measurement and payment
Measurement for payment of stone masonry will be made to the line of the structures as shown
in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The unit rate shall cover the cost of all labors,
materials, equipment and tools, and operations required for stone masonry which includes flush
pointing.
The masonry having more than 1m height shall be provided with sufficient weep holes in wall
and the back side of the hole provided with filter gravel material so that the hole will not be
clogged.
The backfilling of stone masonry wall shall be provided with stone packing as per the instruction
of engineer.
15.3 Stone Soling
Selected stones from site are laid in required dimension after leveling ground and placed intact
so that the load from superstructure shall be transformed to foundation uniformly. The Thickness
shall be provided by engineer if unspecified at the drawings. Soling has to be in uniform bedding
and leveled. The level difference in foundation shall be covered with sufficient provision so that
the top s leveled.
The ground is prepared and checked thoroughly by site in charges before soling, the stones are
stacked in pattern and are never tilted or laid one over other
Measurement and Payment of Stone soling shall be based on unit rate as mention in BOQ in
Cubic menters as per shown in design drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
15.4 Wet Rip-rap
Wet rip rap will be employed for canal protection or canal lining. Thickness of wet rip rap shall be
as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Cement mortar for wet riprap shall be
of one part of cement and six parts of sand in volume, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.
Measurement for payment of wet riprap will be made by volume to the lines shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The unit rate shall cover the cost of all labors,
materials, equipment and tools, and operations required for wet riprap including flush pointing.
15.6 Dry Rip-rap
Dry riprap will be employed for upstream or downstream protection work of hydraulic structures
like weir and sluice structure.
Riprap shall be taken from hard rock layers of quarries or rock excavation or underground rock
excavation as approved by the Engineer. The rock shall be of compact, firmly bound and uniform
grains texture and absolutely weather resistant, shall not have cracks, holes, laminations or
detrimental materials.
The rock blocks shall be of natural irregular cubic shape and of the size from 0.5 m to 1.0 m for
placement in the bottom. Thin-sliced blocks shall not be accepted. Any blocks covered by
impurities shall be cleaned thoroughly before used. Moisture absorption of rock blocks shall be
limited to such a quantity that any cracking, bursting and chipping as a result of wave action or
weather influence will not occur.
Unless it is indicated otherwise, the Contractor shall submit rock samples to be used in the
bottom and slope protection for the approval of the Engineer. Furthermore, he shall send
samples at his own cost to the place assigned by the Engineer for the performance of the all
required tests and at least 30 days before the beginning of the rip rap placement.
The use of rocks mixed with soil, sand, clay, and decomposed or decomposable materials, or the
use of small rock fragments shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall not use weathered,
fractured, dirty, inadequate grain-size distributed material or any material that, in the Engineer's
opinion, is not sufficiently durable, and because of this, the Contractor shall not demand
compensation different from the unit prices established for riprap.
Thickness of dry riprap shall be as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Stone not meeting requirements shall be rejected and the Contractor shall without delay follow
instructions to remove such stone from site at the Contractor's own expense.
Stones shall be tightly placed so that the gaps or voids among stones are reduced as much as
possible. The exposed surface shall be neatly combined and leveled so that no stone can be
easily removed by men, animal or water flow.
Thickness of dry riprap shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Measurement for payment of dry riprap will be made by volume to the lines shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The unit rate shall cover the cost of all labors, materials,
equipment and tools, and operations require for dry riprap.
The Contractor shall in no circumstances be entitled to payment for stone which has not been
accepted. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents the following shall apply for
riprap.
15.7 Riprap Protection
The Contractor shall place riprap as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The
riprap material shall meet the following requirements.
- From 50% to 80% by weight of the rock fragments shall weigh 2500kg or more shall be 60 cm -
100cm in diameter.
- No more than 5% of any truck load of this material shall pass the No.4 ASTM Sieve
The riprap can be placed over the gravel bedding to produce a dense and stable rock blanket
over the surface required protection, and shall be constructed within the specified to clearance
the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.
The rip rap shall be placed to its full course thickness in on operation and in such a manner as to
avoid displacing the underlying materials. The finished riprap shall be free from objectionable
pockets of small stones and clusters of large stones of the riprap.
Rearranging of individual stones of the riprap may be required to the extent necessary in the
opinion of the Engineer when the finished riprap is judged to be arranged in disordered
distribution.
Measurement and Payment
Measurement for payment of riprap will be made of the riprap in place to the lines, grades and
dimensions shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer.
Payment for riprap will be made at the unit price per cubic meter which unit price shall include
the entire cost of providing and placing the riprap but excluding the cost of excavation and
haulage.
15.8 Stone pitching
The Contractor shall perform the stone pitching to the lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
If not otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, the foundation for stone pitching shall be
constructed with a continuous layer of concrete M15 as specified in CONCRETE WORK.
Stone shall be arranged to avoid extreme irregularity of the pitching surface, and joint surfaces
shall be smoothed with hammers. Gaps shall be filled with concrete so that each stone will not
move.
Placing of the stone pitching shall not begin until the finishing stakes set as shown on the
Drawings, which work have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
The stones shall be cleaned and thoroughly saturated with water immediately prior to any
pitching is placed, and the foundation bed which shall be cleaned and moistened before the
concrete is spread. The joints shall be full and flushed with concrete. The exposed faces of
individual stones shall be parallel to the face of the slope.
The stone pitching with the concrete shall be satisfactorily protected from the sun and shall be
kept thoroughly wet for at least three days for curing. The stone pitching shall be provided with
the drain holes and expansion joint as directed by the Engineer.
The surface of completed stone pitching shall be even to line and level or slope with a protruding
tolerance not exceeding 10 cm.
Measurement for payment of stone pitching will be made on the basis of placed area in square
meters determined by the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
Payment will be made for the number of square meters measured as provided above at the
respective unit prices per square meter stated in the Bill of Quantities, which unit price for stone
pitching shall constitute full compensation for the cost of all labor, tools, equipment, and
materials including selection, bedding, placing, grading and joining the stone pitching, concreting
and mortaring, gravel bedding if required, in foundation and other items necessary to complete
the Works.
16. GEO-TEXTILES
16.1 General
In areas shown on the Drawing or specifically designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
place in position geo-textiles as the integral part of the structures. Terrafix or approved
equivalent (Type-A) and secutex or approved equivalent Geo-textiles (Type-B) shall be used by
the Contractor for it.
The Contractor shall submit detailed design together with working drawings of geo-textiles
installation supported with literature, case studies and technical advice from the manufacturer.
16.2 Scope of Work
The work specified in this clause consist of the use of:
- Geo-textile terrafix 600 or approved equivalent (Type-A) shall be used at the bottom of the
Reservoir, Desanding Basin, Weir and Intake as mentioned in the Drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer.
- Geo-texitle Secutex 316R or approved equivalent (Type-B) shall be used at the sides of the
Reservoir, Desanding Basin and Canal as mentioned in the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.
16.3 Specification for Supply (Type-A)
Geo-textiles (Type-A) are mechanically bonded single layered non woven filter fabric. The fibres
form a labyrinthic structure with countless pore channels. This represents an idle copy of the
original soil structure. A typical Terrifix 600 Geo-textiles commonly used for hydraulic
structure/drainage system comprise of the following technical requirements.
Product description : Single layered non-woven filter fabric
Bonding : Needle-punching
Raw material : PES/PP/PA
Average Mass/m2 : 603 gm
Average Thickness : 5.3 mm
Maximum tensile strength (longitudional) :  12,0 kN/m
(Transverse) :  12,0 kN/m
Elongation at Maximum
tensile strength (longitudional) :  70%
(Transverse) :  45%
Effective opening size : 0,08 mm
Water permeability coefficient to BAW : 1.8 x 10-3 m/s
Filter stable towards soil type according to BAW : 1/2/3
16.4 Measurement and Payment
Measurement and payment of Geotextile shall be made against measured square meter of laid
geotextile in the field. However the laps and folds in application shall be reduced in the
calculation for preventing double counting of the area and application surfaces.
17. SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE DRAIN
17.1 Scope of Work
The work under this Clause shall cover the construction of drainage structures including the
general items pertaining to materials, excavation, foundation, construction or installation, and
backfill in connection with drainage structures.
17.2 Materials
17.2.1 Steel drain pipes and fittings.
The Contractor shall furnish and install steel drain pipes including necessary fittings as shown on
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The steel Pipe shall conform to the requirements of
IS, Carbon Steel Pipes for Ordinary Piping or approved equivalent.
17.2.2 Reinforced concrete drain pipes
The Contractor shall furnish and install reinforced concrete drain pipes as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Reinforced Concrete Pipes shall conform to the
requirements of IS or approved equivalent, and provisions stipulated in CONCRETE WORK.
17.2.3 P.V.C drain pipes and fittings
The Contractor shall furnish and install the Poly Vinyl Chloride (P.V.C.) drain pipes including
necessary fittings as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The P.V.C drain
pipe shall conform to the requirements of IS, unplasticized poly vinyl chloride pipes or approved
equivalent, and provisions stipulated in CONCRETE WORK.
17.2.4 Side ditch

The Contractor shall furnish and install side ditch with cobble stone and concrete and concrete
type M15 shall be prescribed in CONCRETE WORK. Cobble stone to be used for side ditch shall
be complied with the minimum/maximum range of 80 mm to 100 mm.
17.2.5 Concrete ditch
The contractor shall furnish and install concrete ditch. The concrete type M15 which shall be as
per prescribed in CONCRETE WORK. Gravel foundation shall be clean, sound and angular
gravel and well graded with maximum particle size of 40 mm. Execution of gravel foundation
shall be done as prescribed in 2.3.3 (2) execution of work. The concrete ditch is either precast or
placed in site.
17.2.6 Drainage Pipe Installation
Excavation for trenches shall be performed in accordance with the applicable requirements,
Open Cut Excavation, in these Specification. Bedding surface shall provide a firm foundation of
uniform density. Each section of pipe shall rest upon the pipe bed for its full length, with recess
excavated to accommodate bells and joint.
Each pipe shall be carefully inspected before it is laid. Any defective or damaged pipe shall be
rejected. The laying of pipe shall proceed upgrade beginning at the lower end of the pipeline.
Under no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water and no pipe shall be laid when the trench
conditions or weather is unsuitable for trenches during construction shall be borne by the
Contractor.
When pipe laying is interrupted, the Contractor shall seal the ends of the pipe line to prevent the
entry of water or foreign matter. No backfill or concrete shall be placed over or around the pipes
until the installation has been approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, bedding material below pipe shall be
clean sand or other approved granular material and remaining backfill in the pipe trenches shall
be done with approved material free from stones larger than 80 mm and other objectionable
material.
Concrete used for drainage structures shall conform to the applicable requirements of
CONCRETE WORK, in these Specifications. Mortar shall be stiff and composed of 1 part
Portland cement and not more than 2 parts sand.
Surface drainage with concrete gutters, ditches and catch basins, and drain pipes installed on
the shot concrete protective coatings are considered a part of concrete work.
After Cutting, and before threading, all steel pipes shall be reamed and have burs removed. All
screw joints shall be made with graphite or other approved compound applied to made threads
only. Thread shall be full cut and not more than 3 threads on the pipe shall remain exposed.
Flanged joints shall be faced true, packed and made up perfectly square and tight Gaskets shall
be ring type 1.5 mm thick sheet asbestos.
Joints in P.V.C. pipes and fitting shall be socket or threaded joints made up as recommended by
the manufacturer.
After the bedding has been prepared and the pipe or ditch installed, backfill material, at a
moisture content which will facilitate compaction, shall be placed alongside the pipe or ditch in
layer not exceeding 15 cm in depth unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings.
Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the ditch or pipe. Each layer
shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling, tamping with mechanical rammers, or by hand tamping
with heavy iron tampers of which the tamping face area shall not exceed 150 sq.cm. This method
of filling and compacting shall be continued until the fill has reached an elevation 30 cm above
the top of the Pipe or ditch. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled and thoroughly
compacted in layers not exceeding 15 cm. The density of compaction shall be as specified by the
Engineer.
17.3.1 Steel drain, reinforced concrete, P.V.C drains pipes and fitting.
Measurement for payment of drain pipe will be made on the basis of placed length at center line
of steel Pipe in linear meters determined by designed line as shown on the Drawings or directed
by the Engineer.
Payment will be made for the number of linear meters measured as provided above at the
respective unit price per meter stated in the Bill of Quantities, which unit price for drain pipe shall
constitute full compensation for the cost of all labor, tools, equipment and materials jointing the
steel pipes and fittings, and other items necessary to complete the Works.
17.3.2 Side drain/ditch
Measurement for payment of side ditch will be made on the basis of placed length at center line
of side ditch in linear meters as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
Payment will be made for the number of linear meters measured as provided above at the
respective unit price per meter stated in the Bill of Quantities, which unit price for side ditch shall
constitute full compensation for the cost of all labor, tools equipment and materials including
furnishing, loading, hauling, unloading, installing and concreting the side ditch and other items
necessary to complete the works.
No additional payment shall be made for clearing and stripping, excavation, backfill and the other
items related to the construction of side ditch.
17.3.3 Concrete ditch
Measurement for concrete ditch will be made on the basis of placed length at center line of
concrete ditch in linear meters determined by the designed lines as shown on the Drawings or
Payment will be made for the linear meters measured as provided above at the unit price per
linear meter stated in the Bill of Quantities, which unit price shall compensate the cost of all
labors, tools, equipment and material including gravel foundation. The cost shall include
furnishing, loading, handling, unloading, installing and concreting the ditch and foundation and
other items required to complete the works.
No additional payment shall be made for clearing and stripping, excavation, backfill and the other
items related to the construction of concrete ditch.
17.4 PERFORATED PIPE
17.4.1 Scope of Work
The work under this Clause shall cover the fabrication or procurement, installation and testing of
perforated pipes for Intake, Power Canal and Desanding Basin as specified in the Drawing or
instructed by the Engineer. The perforated pipe is defined to be reinforced concrete pipe with a
number of small holes to collect the submerged water.
17.4.2 Materials
The Contractor shall fabricate or procure the perforated pipe in the following manner:
(1) Structure : Reinforced concreted perforated pipe
(2) Shape : Circular type
(3) Internal diameter : 300 mm or as shown in the Drawings
(4) Unit length of pipe : 2.5 m to 3.0 m
(5) Class of pipe : NP3 (NS)
(6) The number of holes : between 20 to 30 per m2
(7) Size of holes : between 10 mm and 20 mm in diameter

The Contractor shall submit the detailed Drawings for fabrication or procurement of the
perforated pipes to the Engineer for approval.
17.4.3 Testing prior to installation
The Contractor shall submit the procedures of testing to check the workability of the perforated
pipe prior to installation. Testing shall be made at site where the perforated pipes are placed. It
required to prepare a few sample pipes for testing before fabrication or procurement of the
required number of the perforated pipe. The Engineer may change the design of the perforated
pipe if necessary
17.4.4 Installation of the perforated pipe
The exact location of the perforated pipes to be placed is as shown in the Drawing or directed by
the Engineer. The arrangement of the perforated pipes is depended on the flow direction of the
submerged flow. The Contractor shall confirm the final decision of the perforated pipe
arrangement to the Engineer prior to installation.
17.4.5 Joint between the perforated pipes
Joint between the perforated pipes shall be inserted type with un-fixed joint, which is not mortal
and other joint materials shall be provided for the connection. The Contractor shall provide the
inserted joint at the edge of the perforated pipes at time of the fabrication or procurement.
17.4.6 Backfill with selected materials
Backfill shall be carried out after approval of the Engineer. The materials of the backfill are as
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. The Engineer may change the materials of
backfill depended on the test results. The Contractor shall confirm the backfill materials prior to
the preparation of the materials to the Engineer.
Measurement for payment of perforated pipe will be made on the basis of placed length at center
line of perforated pipes in linear meters determined by the designed line as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
Payment will be made for the number of linear meters measured as provided above at the unit
price per meter stated in the Bill of Quantities, which unit price shall constitute full compensation
for the cost of all labor, tools, equipment and materials, for fabrication, transportation, installation,
jointing and fittings and other items necessary to complete the works.
18. BRICK MASONRY WORK
This specification covers all construction work of powerhouse and control building wall at
Switchyard Area and Power House Area.
18.1 Materials
(a) Brick units shall be sound, well burned, and free from defects that would impair its strength or
affect its service-ability.
(b) Cement shall be ordinary portland as per ASTM C150 Type 1 or equivalent.
(c) Sand shall be clean, fine, sharp granules, free from foreign or deleterious matter.
(d) Water shall be clean and free from acid, alkalis, oil or organic matter.
The Contractor should submit samples of cement, sand and lime for Employer's/Employer's
Representative's approval.
18.2 Mortar mixtures
The type of mortar mixture for brick masonry shall be done in 1:4 mix ratios, but for all other
purposed the following shall be used.
Typical Ratio for Mortars for masonry and plastering works
Purpose Proportion by weight
Cement Sand
Plastering (internal walls of buildings) 1 6
Blockwork; brickwork; rubble stone masonry (general). 1 4
Plastering (external walls of buildings)
Rubble stone masonry (high water velocity/turbulence). 1 3
Plastering (hydraulic structures)
Dressed stone masonry. 1 2
Pointing or plastering channels with very high water velocity.
Inverts in drains, manholes, etc.
The cement and sand shall first be mixed dry until the cement color. The mix however has to be
verified before starting work from the Engineer at site.
18.3 Brick masonry laying
(a) Lay brick masonry in accurately spaced courses, level, plumb and true to line.
(b) Soak brick units in clean water for six hour before laying. Units shall be damped when laid.
(c) Lay brick in running bond with joints approximately 10mm wide.
(d) When brick masonry walls cross the recessed floor cable trenches provide and install cast-in-
situ concrete Lintels of sufficient size and strength to support and carry masonry walls across the
trench sprays.
(e) Reinforced all masonry walls with cast-in-situ reinforced concrete formed flush with the
masonry surfaces for cement plaster-finish.
(f) Provide concrete pilasters and horizontal tie for every 9 square meters of masonry wall
surface, plus at all corners and door Jambs.
(g) All brick masonry wall shall be constructed in brick thickness with English or Flemish bond as
shown in the drawings
18.4 Curing
Spray masonry surfaces with water thrice daily for a period of 10 days, or until the surface
receives a plaster finish.
18.5 Protection
Where exposed to weather, protect top of masonry with water tied material in such a way that it
will protect the completed work. Masonry wall shall set for 48 hours before any load is applied on
the completed work.
Measurement and payment of brick works shall be done based on cubic meter of the volume of
wall as directed in design drawing or as directed by Engineer. There will be deduction on
opening from such quantity. There will be no other payment against curing and extra shoring,
protection arrangement for the purpose of lying of brick masonry wall. The Rate quoted in BOQ
shall include all sorts of arrangements needed for brick masonry works including curing.
19. PLASTER & TILE WORK
19.1 Plaster
19.1.1 Materials
Shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below:
(a) Sand
Sand shall be coarse, clean sharp sand, free from clay, loam or other impurities. Sand shall be
uniformly graded from coarse to fine.
(b) Portland cement

Portland cement shall be as per ASTM C150 Type I or equivalent. Only one brand of cement of
53 grades shall be used in the work.
(c) Water shall be clean, fresh and free from injurious amount of oils, acids, alkalis and organic
matter.
19.1.2 Construction
(a) Thickness of plaster
Thickness of plaster from the face of the plaster base to the finish plaster surface shall be 2.0
cm.
Should it be necessary, the Employer/Employer's Representative can require that temporary
metal grounds be used to assure a full true finish surface. Voids left by removal of ground shall
be filled flush with plaster.
(b) Preparation for plastering
Concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of paint, efflorescence, oil, grease, acids,
and other loose or foreign matter prior to application of base coats. No plasterwork shall be
applied on masonry work less than 2 weeks old.
(c) Mixing of plaster
Plaster shall be mixed in mechanical mixers where hand mixing is approved for small quantities.
Caked or lamped material shall not be used. Each batch shall be proportioned by volume,
accurately measured by manual or mechanical devices, and thoroughly mixed with the minimum
amount of water until uniform in color and consistency. Re-tempering will not be permitted and
plaster that has begun to stiffen shall be discarded. Mortar 90 minutes after mixing shall be
rejected for the plastering work.
(d) Proportions
These are to be differentiated into 2 types:
(1) 1 PC: 3 sand
(3) 1 PC: 4 sand
Type (1) is to be used on all external walls, ceiling and floors.
Type (2) is to be used everywhere else.
19.2 Tiles
19.2.1 Terrazzo tiles
(a) Materials
(1) Precast terrazzo tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be 30cm x 30cm and wall base units of grade 1, according to American
Standard or equivalent.
Tiles shall consist of two layers:
- First layer is 10mm thick with a special weight of 2.34kg consisting of:
60% “Tulung Agung” chips (4-10mm), and
40% Cement & cement color material
- Second layer is 15mm thick, consisting of 1 part Portland cement and 4 parts “Concrete Sand”.
Average weight of tiles is to be 5.62kg and tensile strength shall be 58.3kg/cm2., Samples shall
be verified from site engineer before placement.
(2) Mortar
Mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and two parts of sand.
(3) Sand
Sand shall be hard, clean, and free from mud and other material not desirable for setting mortar.
(4) Cement
Portland cement shall be as per ASTM C150 Type I or equivalent. Only one brand of cement of
53 grades shall be used in the work.
(5) Water
Water shall be fresh, clean and free from acids, alkali sewage and other organic matter.
(b) Installation
(1) Setting beds
Settings beds shall be composed by volume of 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts damp sand, and
mixed with the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mass.
Area of setting bed spread at one time shall be only as large as can be covered with tiles before
the mortar has obtained its initial set. Surplus mortar shall be removed.
Setting beds shall be spread and tampered to force out air pockets screened to a true plane, and
sloped to drain or leveled as required.
The average thickness of setting bed in any room or space shall be less than 30mm, but in no
case shall be setting beds lees than 20mm or more than 30mm thick.
(2) Setting
Before installation, the upper surface of precast terrazzo tiles shall be preserved with material
specified by the Manufacturer. The preservative will not discolor the terrazzo nor leave a tacky or
stickily film of the surface after power polishing.
Precast terrazzo floor tiles shall be laid individually so that the joint between the tiles will be
uniform and not less than 3mm nor more than 6mm in width.
(3) Grouting
All joints in floor terrazzo tiles shall be thoroughly filled and flushed with a grout mixture
composed of 1 part cement to 2 parts sand by volume, and mixed with a minimum amount of
water. Color pigment shall be added to obtain the same color of mortar, to match the color of the
adjoining terrazzo tiles. Joints shall be tooled smooth, excess grout shall be removed by use of a
sponge, squeegee, or burlap to finish the joints and clean the surface without disturbing the floor
surface.
(4)Grinding
Carborundum disc shall be used for grinding. First grinding is to be carried out at least three days
after setting: a good supply of water is used in this grinding. After the grinding, the whole area
must be scrubbed with water to remove the slurry caused by the grinding. Should this first
grinding be not sufficient to produce the required polish, a second grindings, after a further five
days is made with finer grained disc. The whole is washed with hot water and pure soft soap
after the final grinding.
19.2.2 Ceramic Tile
Manufacturer’s original containers, bundles, or packages shall be delivered to the site unopened
with seals unbroken and labels intact. Floor- tile operations in spaces requiring wall tiles shall not
be started until after the wall-tile installation has been completed. Ceramic tile shall be installed
in wall of bathroom up to the height of 2m.
Surface to receive applications of materials shall be clean and free from dirt, dust, oil, grease,
and other objectionable matter.
(a) Materials
(1) Ceramic tiles shall be 11cm x 22cm/22 cm x 22 cm. standard grade. Colors and patterns
shall be selected later by the Employer/Employer's Representative.
(2) Epoxy-resin grout
Epoxy-resin grout shall consist of an intimate of epoxy-resinous material non-volatile extenders,
properly selected filler materials, and setting agent.
(3) Portland cement
Portland cement to be used shall be white cement conforming to ASTM or equivalent.
(b) Installation
Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular, and of even width not exceeding 1.6mm. Wainscots
shall be built of full courses. That may extend to a greater height but in no case lower than the
height shown.
Vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the entire height of the tile work. Damaged or
defective tiles shall be replaced.
Setting bed of ceramic tile shall be of cement sand mortar 1: 1 of 10mm thickness. The entire
joint shall be provided with white cement.
(c) Grouting
Tiles shall have the edges wetted and shall be grouted full with a plastic mix of neat, white
cement immediately after a suitable area of tiles has been set. The joints shall be tooled slightly
concave, and the excess mortar shall be cut off and wiped from the face of the tiles. Interstices
or depression left in the mortar joints after the grout has been cleaned from the surface shall be
roughened at once and filled to the spring line of the cushion edge before the mortar begins to
harden.
(d) Cleaning and Protecting
Upon completion, wall surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. Acid shall not be used for cleaning of
glazed tiles. After the grout has set, tile wall surface shall be given protective coat of a non-
corrosive soap or other approved method of protection.
(e) Samples
Samples of materials proposed for use shall be submitted to the Employer/Employer's
Representative for approval before materials represented by the samples are delivered to the
site.
Measurement and payment of Plaster and tile works shall be done based on square meter of the
area of applicable wall and floor as directed in design drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
There will be deduction on opening from such quantity. There will be no other payment against
curing and extra shoring, protection arrangement for the purpose of lying of plasters and tiles in
wall and floors. The Rate quoted in BOQ shall include all sorts of arrangements needed for such
works in complete finishing.
20. DOOR AND WINDOW
The Contractor shall furnish and install doors and windows. The Contractor shall prepare and
submit shop drawings of doors and windows to Employer/Employer's Representative for
approval, prior to the execution of the erection work from floor level.
20.1 Aluminum Doors and Windows
Doors and windows shall be of the types indicated below. Each window shall consist of a unit
including frame, mullions where indicated or required, and anchors. Aluminum doors shall be
used in entrance in two panels. Windows shall be provided with top removable ventilation. Size
of the window shall not be less than 1.20m x 1.60m (w x h).
(a) Frames
All frame sections shall be tubular extruded aluminum shapes and of alloy 6063-T52. Frame
sections shall be not less than 45mm face dimension x 115mm deep. Members shall be
designed for recessed glazing to receive 19mm thick insulating glass, glazed with vinyl glazing
inserts.
(b) Doors and Windows
Doors and windows shall be arranged for inside glazing with aluminum snap-in glazing beads
designed to accommodate insulating glass as specified. Snap-in glazing beads shall securely
interlock into the extruded window sections. Glazing rebate legs shall not be less than 19mm in
height.
(c) Mullions, Sills and Trims
Mullions, sills, trim and other window sub-assemblies, indicated on the drawings or as necessary
to properly complete each aluminum door and window installation, shall be of size and design to
suit the window assembly, be compatible with the windows, and conform to the requirements for
these sub-assemblies as specified in Section 1, General Requirements, Part A, in ANSI A134.1.
(d) Anchors and Clips
Anchors, clips, bolt and screws necessary to secure doors, windows and mullions shall be
provided and shall be, at manufacturer’s option, either aluminum non-magnetic stainless steel, or
zinc coated steel.
(e) Installation
Doors and windows shall be installed without forcing or distortion to that sills and heads are level
and jambs are plumb.
Window frames shall be securely anchored into the supporting construction. Joints between
metal windows and metal members including mullions shall be set in mastic of the type
recommended by the window manufacturer. Excess mastic shall be removed before hardening.
Metal surface shall be cleaned and any staining or discoloring of the finish shall be restored or
the unit replaced.
20.2 Timber Doors and windows
20.2.1 Materials
Timber shall be subjected to Employer's/Employer's Representative's approval.
(a) Salwood
- Sizes and pattern
Lumber shall be surfaced four sides, and worked according to patterns as are indicated or
specified on the drawings. Exposed members for transparent finish shall be matched for
compatibility of grain and color between adjoining members; for paint finish, is not required. The
size of frame of panel shall not be less than 40mm x 100mm and the size of door frame shall not
be less than 75mm x 120mm.
-Moisture content
At the time of delivery, the moisture content shall not exceed 15% for material of 2.5cm or less in
thickness, and shall not exceed 19% for material over 2.5cm in thickness.
(b) Teak Plywood
All interior plywood for transparent finish shall be of equal and uniform of color and graining, such
as for door panels. Hardwood plywood shall be or premium grade. Plywood for paint finish
matching for compatibility is not required, such as for ceiling.
(c) Veneers
Veneers on wood doors, panels and other exposed wood work shall be of 4mm thick.
(d) Fasteners
Only galvanized fasteners will be used.
(e) Glue
Fully waterproof throughout, such as "herein" or equal.
(f) Putty
Shall conform to IS Standards or equivalent.
20.2.2 Construction
(a) Fastening for Exposed Members
Other than two small positioning nails per sub-assembly of plywood no exposed nails shall be
used. All exposed members are to be glued using either pressure of electric wood welder. All
traces of excess glue shall be removed. Tops shall be fastened to sub-or web frames with
concealed clips, screws, glue blocks or similar hidden fastenings. Exposed ends shall be lock
mitered and glued to face plates.
(b) Edge Treatment
Visible edge shall be banded with lumber edging, glued under pressure with no nails allowed.
Species shall match the face veneers of plywood, but may be of any species on particleboard.
(c) Size of Door
Unless and otherwise specified, the size of door panel shall not be less than 1.0 x 2.30m (W x h)
20.2.3 Hardware
Hardware such as hinges, cylinder locks, handles and door closers shall be stainless steel of
excellent quality. Samples of hardware shall be submitted to Employer/Employer's
Representative for approval. Cylinder locks and door closers shall be installed with the doors and
windows according to the instructions of Employer/Employer's Representative. Master key for all
locks shall be provided.
Measurement and payment of door and windows shall be based on square meter of area of
applicable door and window opening. That shall include all sorts of material for posts, frames,
anchors, grouts, nails, paints and all finished and placed in positing as directed in drawing or as
21. PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND SANITARY FITTINGS
21.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish, install and test the complete indoor Potable Water, Service Water,
Plumbing, Storm Drainage and Sanitary Sewer Systems. This shall also include connection of
water pipes to the existing water system, as the case may be, and installation of complete
system.
All necessary incidentals such as sanitary fittings, wash bowl water closet, equipment supports,
flashing, excavation and backfill, disposal of surplus dirt and rubbish, permits and inspections,
insurance, taxes, expenses and materials required for complete, satisfactory and legal
installation shall be borne by the contractor.
The Contractor shall furnish satisfactorily functioning installations. All items of labor, material of
equipment not specifically mentioned herein, but incidental to or required for a complete
installation and proper operation of the above-mentioned systems, shall be included.
The Contractor shall furnish and install 50mm dia G.I. Pipe for boring, 1 cubic m capacity of G.I.
Water tank at roof and 2HP Centrifugal pump to fill the water in the elevated water tank and all
necessary associated appurtenance.
Drip drains for the air-conditioning installations and equipment drains are included in this scope.
21.2 Standards
The work shall be carried out in accordance with Codes National Plumbing Code, U.S.
Department of Commerce, unless otherwise indicated.
21.3 Workmanship
The installation shall be made in neat, orderly and workmanship manner, conforming in every
way to the accepted standards of the best commercial practice.
21.4 Design requirements
The plumbing and drainage of all the buildings shall be as per the National Standard Plumbing
Code.
For the potable and service water supply to the building, and over storage tank of 1 cubic m
storage capacity will have to be provided by the Contractor. The tank will be mounted on the
roof. The water distribution inside the building will be taken from this overhead tank.
The design of the plumbing system shall be developed by the Contractor. Floor drains, drain
from washbasin and drain from the equipment shall be run separately from sanitary sewer and
connected to the outdoor switchyard water drainage system.
Sanitary sewer drain from the building will be connected to the septic tank (1.0m x 2.5m x 1.5m)
and outlet from septic tank connected to the soak pit (1.0m dia. and 3.0m deep). Overflow from
the soak pit shall be connected to the switchyard drainage system.
(a) Septic tank shall be constructed in double compartment in 240mm thick brick masonry wall
with 1: 4 cement concrete 1: 2: 4 in 20mm thickness. The septic tank shall be provided with
removable R.C.C. slab cover.
(b) Soak pit shall be constructed in honeycombed brick wall of 240mm thick with 1: 4 cement
sand mortar. The pit shall be filled with brick of size longer than 60mm.
(c) Sewage pipe shall be heavy quality cast iron and not less than 100mm dia. in size.
(d) Drain pipe to connect drainage system from soak pit shall be used of 100mm dia. of
polyethylene pipe of heavy quality.
(e) All the water supply pipe shall be heavy quality of galvanized steel pipe required size.
Measurement and payment of plumbing works shall be paid for the set of bathroom fitting as
mentioned in drawings or as directed by the Engineer. That shall include all sorts of material
procurement, transportation and fixing in position and connecting the water pipeline from the
water supply system or providing from the source identified. The safe disposal of wastage and
sanitation all shall confirmed and included in one set of bathroom and fitting works.
22. PAINT, GLAZING, AND CGI ROOFING
22.1 Painting
22.1.1 General
All surfaces shall be painted except the following :
(a) Exterior:
Roofing, paving, concrete, nonferrous metals, glass, pre-finished items.
(b) Interior:
Ceramic tile, glass, pre-finished surfaces, non-ferrous metals, stainless steel, attic surfaces.
22.1.2 Materials
A list of the painting materials and their colors, which are to be applied to the specified surface,
shall be submitted to the Employer/Employer's Representative for approval.
22.1.3 Paint application
The finished surface shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pales, brush marks, and
variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be complete, and coat shall be so applied
as to produce film of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given to insure that all surfaces
including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equivalent to that of
adjacent painted surfaces.
Adjacent areas and installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other approved
precautionary measures.
Metal or wood surface adjacent to surface to receive water-thinned paints shall be primed and/or
touched up prior to the application of water-thinned paints. The first coat on plaster shall include
such repeated touching up of suction spots or overall applications of primer sealer as necessary
to produce a uniform color and gloss. The first coat on both faces of wood doors shall be applied
at essentially the same time.
(a) Coating Progress
Sufficient time shall elapse between successive coats to permit proper drying. This period shall
be modified as necessary to suit adverse weather conditions.
Oil base solvent-type paints shall be considered dry for recoating when the paints feels firm,
does not deform or feel stickily under moderate pressure of the thumb, and the application of
another coat of paint does not cause lifting or less of adhesion of the undercoat.
Coating shall be as follows:
(1) All interior and exterior plastered surfaces:
- First coat: 1 coat of Alkali Resistance Primer
- Second coat:2 coat of Weather shield Exterior Wall Finish in waterproof snowcem paint
(2) Gloss finish wood:
- First coat: 1 coat of Wood Primer
- Second coat: 2 coat of Synthetic Super Gloss
(3) Interior transparent finish wood:
- First coat: 1 coat of Wood Primer
- Second coat: 2 coat of Teak Oil
(4) Metal surface:
- First coat: 1 coat of Metal Primer Chromate
- Second coat: 2 coats of Aluminum Paint
(b) Storage, Mixing and Thinning
At time of application, paint shall show no signs of hard settling, excessive skinning, levering, or
other deterioration. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency
during application.
Where necessary to suit conditions of surface, temperature, weather, and method of application,
package pint may be thinned immediately prior to application in accordance with the
manufacturer’s directions, but not excess of 0.5 liter of suitable thinner per 4 liter. The use of
thinner for any reason shall not relieve Contractor from obtaining complete hiding.
Samples shall be clearly identified by designated name, specification number batch number,
project contract number, batch number, intended use, and quantity involved. At the discretion of
the Employer/Employer's Representative samples may be tested before approval, or materials
may be approved for use based on the test reports furnished. In the latter case the samples will
be retained by the Employer/Employer's Representative for possible future testing should the
material appear to be defective during or after application.
Painting works shall paid in square meter of the area covered in applicable area as directed by
the Engineer. That should include complete items including procurement, transportation,
preparation, shoring and protection arrangement, etc complete.
22.2 Glass and glazing
(a) Sheet glass to be used for door and windows shall be 6mm thick, tinted glass except as
otherwise specified. It shall be of the best quality, free of unevenness, stain or bubbles, and
where so required, figured glass shall be used.
(b) Glazing compounds shall be of suitable type approved for the application.
The use of non-skimming compounds, non-resilient type preformed sealers, and preformed
impregnated type gaskets will not be permitted. Metal sash putty will not be permitted. Materials
used with aluminum frames shall be aluminum colored, non-staining, and not require painting.
(c) Channel glazing compound shall be equal in performance to, but not limited to the following:
(1) Non-drying, knife grade polybutene sealant
(2) One-part acrylic terpolymer sealant
(d) Shop-painted items
Surfaces of fabricated and assembled items that are finish painted by the manufacturer, or
specified to finish painted under other sections of the specifications, are exempted from the
following schedule requirements for surface preparation and painting shop primed items shall
receive surface preparation and finish painting as required by this section.
(e) Colors and tints, including shades of stain, shall match the respective color specimens
selected by the Employer/Employer's Representative.
Stains shall conform in shade to manufacturer’s standard color. Undercoat shall vary slightly
from the color of the next coat.
(f) Surface preparation and pretreatment
Cleaning and pretreatment of surface prior to painting shall be accomplished in accordance with
the detailed requirements specified.
(g) Leaning
Clots and cotton waste that might constitute of fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal
containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work, staging,
scaffolding, and containers shall be removed from the site or destroyed in an approved manner.
Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surface shall be removed and the entire job left clean and
acceptable.
Glass and glazing works shall paid in square meter or area covered in opening applicable to
glazing as directed by the Engineer. That should include complete items including procurement,
transportation, cutting and fixing in position, wastage etc.
22.3 CGI Roofing
Galvanized mild steel sheeting
Hot dipped galvanized mild steel corrugated sheeting shall be used of 22 gauge. Sheets shall be
laid with 250 mm end laps and side laps of 1½ corrugations on the side away from the prevailing
wind.
The sheets shall be fixed to each purlin with 8 mm diameter galvanized mild steel J-bolts each
with one rubber washer, one galvanized dome steel washer and galvanized steel nut. There
shall be a minimum of 3 J-bolts across the width of a sheet.
Holes for bolts shall be punched from the inside of the sheet and shall be in the ridges of
corrugations as fixed and not in the hollows.
CGI Roofing shall be paid in square meter or area covered in roof as mentioned in BOQ, Sheet
Roofing also includes all the cost of truss, purlin, rafter, cover, drain water gutter, cover and drain
water pipes required down to the surface drain.
23. ELECTRICAL
23.1 Luminaries Light Fixtures
Dome light PHILIPS, Crompton Greaves, OASIS or Prior approvals by the Enginee
Wall Bracket PHILIPS, Crompton Greaves, OASIS or Prior approvals by the Engineer
23.2 FTL
Sets Surface/ Recess Havells, Crompton Greaves, OASIS or Prior approvals
by consultant
FTL CG, Havells, GE, OASIS or Prior approvals by the Engineer
PL/GLS/CFL CG, OSRAM, Havells, GE or Prior approvals by the Engineer
23.3 Fan
Exhaust CG, GEC, Khaitan or Prior approvals by the Engineer
Ceiling/Wall CG, GEC, Khaitan or Prior approvals by the Engineer
23.4 Switch/Socket
2 pin 6A Prior approvals by the Engineer
3 pin 16 A Prior approvals by the Engineer
Gang switches Prior approvals by the Engineer
23.5 Distribution Board
MPB HIMALAYAN BIJULEE/HYONJAN or Prior approvals by the Engineer
DB/SDB HIMALAYAN BIJULEE/HYONJAN or Prior approvals by the Engineer
23.6 Circuit Breakers
MCB Merlin Gerin, GE, ABB or Prior approvals by the Engineer
MCCB MITSUBISHI, GE, ABB, MG or Prior approvals by the Engineer
23.7 Cable/Wire
TRISHAKTI, PRAKASH, DELTA or Prior approvals by the Engineer
23.8 Board/Box
There are a number of boards/boxes to be used in the project; viz. DB, MPB and JB etc. They
vary in size, shape quantity, materials and in other aspects and shall be governed by the
followings:
23.9 Distribution Board (Db)
There are numbers of DBs having internal components. These DBs shall be wall mounded, flush
type front opening, double cover/single cover. Each DB having push bottom lock shall contain
and independent bar for neutral and earth. Other details to be followed are in alphabetical order,
below:
23.10 Cable Socket
Cable socket metallic with screw, shall be used for each and every cable entry / exit, into/from
the concerning DB/MPB.
23.11 Lighting
A circuit is intended to feed and control light points viz. GLS, FTL, CFL, Fans some 2/3 pin
convenient outlet etc. A light circuit shall not have > 8 such points or < 1 KW loading whichever is
less. During execution, independent and separate light circuits for each group of points (i.e. GLS
group, FTL group, Fan group etc.) shall be made; in case of 3 pin convenient outlet earth
continuity shall be maintained.
23.12 Power
A power circuit is intended to feed the convenient outlet sockets with earth continuity (Conductor)
such as 3/5/6 pin plugs of different capacities.
23.13 General Circuit
Any circuits not belonging to above mentioned i.e. dedicated power circuit is termed as general
circuit and may contain convenient outlets of different types (e.g. 2 pin/ 3 pin/ 5 pin etc.) and
numbers depending upon the situation.
23.14 Length of the Circuit
Circuits may vary from case to case. The length to be considered shall be the distance between
the concerned MCB/ cut out usually positioned inside the DB’s and the points via switches and
JB s for certain circuit, regardless of its nature (light circuit/power circuit).
23.15 Clearance from Communication Cables
The horizontal and vertical separation between power and communication cable shall be > 500
mm (for any core of cable). Where this cannot maintained, the cables should be laid solid in
insulating compound.
23.16 Clearance from Water Mains
A minimum clearance of 400 mm shall be provided between the water and the power mains.
23.17 Colour Codes
Color codes for visual aids shall be applied in the electrical as listed hereunder:
Red, Yellow and Blue : for phases
Black : For neutral
Green : Earth/Ground
White : for return wires e.g. say from switch to lamp or vice versa.
Gray : for the 3rd middle point connection as in the case of 2 way control
system.
23.18 Discrepancy/Dispute
If any discrepancy is found relating to any item specified or anywhere in the text, the contractor
shall immediately report this in writing to the engineer and shall not start the work unless
clarification has been received with the approval by the engineer.
Should there be any dispute or differences of opinion, then it shall be solved mutually between
contractor and engineer. The Engineer's opinion shall be final and binding to the contractor who
must comply with the architect’s decision.
23.19 Earthing / Grounding
The grounded neutral of the secondary distribution system shall be supplemented by an
equipment grounding system to safeguard equipment and personnel properly. Equipment
grounding system shall be incorporated to all metallic enclosures, cabinets and other conductive
items in close proximity with electrical circuits and shall operate continuously at ground potential
and shall provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. The system shall
comply with IS, BS & NBC
There shall be a number of earthing points. In general they are of the following types:
Equipment earthing meant for the cover/chassis of the electrical equipment normally devoid of
any voltage.
Main system earthing for earth continuity of convenient outlet sockets DB/MPB etc.
23.20 Extra Works / Quantity
Any extra or additional work shall only be executed after the written permission of the engineer
and after prices and budgets for this has been ascertained and approved.
23.21 Inspection and Testing
Upon the physical completion of the job and before putting the installation into service, inspection
and testing shall be thoroughly done and its data recorded in the prescribed tabular form. This
process of inspection and testing shall be continued until all the satisfactory results desired and
designed for as described herein are obtained. The following tests shall be performed:
I.5.1 Leakage (Insulation) Test Between Conductors.
I.5.2 Leakage (Insulation) Test between the Installation and Ground earth
I.5.3 Physical/Mechanical strength test
I.5.4 Circuit Test
I.5.5 Ring Main Continuity
I.5.6 Earth/Ground/Lightning protection System Test
I.5.7 As described by manufacturer test
I.5.8 Schedule test
23.22 Joints of Wires and Cables
All wires inside the JB’s shall be joined with the mechanical connectors wherever possible and if
not then by PVC tapes (of appropriate colors) where conductors have lap and twist joints (not
twist and knot joints). They shall be taped and colored coded joints in through run of any circuits
except at JB’s are prohibited.
23.23 Lightning Protection System
In order to protect the high voltage electrical equipment and the personnel against atmospheric
lightning surges the incoming over-headlines and the metallic parts of the building should be
effectively earthed with minimum impedances, to discharge the surge prior to reaching surge
voltage to the equipment or personnel to be protected. (if necessary)
23.24 Qualification of Working Personnel
The working personnel shall be experienced and shall have suitable qualification from a
recognized technical school. It is desirable that even the lowest technical class of workers shall
be able to certificates to authenticate their claims of experience.
23.25 Scope
The works covered shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services in
connection with the complete work as indicated.
23.26 Wire
Wires of various, sizes, types and lengths, shall be used. In any thorough runs the wires shall not
be joined. Similarly, dissimilar material e.g. Al, Cu shall not be joined tighter. Bare wire shall not
be used, unless main earth anywhere in this project.
23.27 Light Point

Loop-in-system shall be employed in our case of light circuit(s) where the following shall be
maintained. Phase wire must be looped right from the switch bank and in no case be looped
directly from the light point. Neutral may be looped either as the phase wire or also may be
looped directly from the light point as the case may be. No joints throughout the wiring run of the
given circuit are allowed.
23.28 Workmanship
Good workmanship is an essential requirement for compliance with the clause in this
documentation. The workmanship shall be evaluated from some of the following stand points
through it shall not be limited to them:
W.4.1 Connection of wires/cables inside DB/MPB
W.4.2 Fitting of outlet socket for light fixtures.
W.4.3 Fixing of PVC channels, wooden batten, links clips etc.
W.4.4 Terminating of cables in to the boxes.
W.4.5 Tightening screws etc.
W.4.6 Adherence to color coding practice during the wiring.
W.4.7 The way of laying of different items viz. pipe, conduit, trench, wire.
W.4.8 The technology of earthing.
W.4.9 Professional dedication and interest in the work.
W.4.10 Neatness and cleanliness on the work site at all times
23.29 GENERAL
The whole Electrical System has designed to provide and Electrical service and distribution
system of adequate capacity and protection required for the design intent of the building with
compound. The following system has been incorporated within the designed.
Light: Normal/Special
Power: Appliances, General, PC, special (Normal/Essential)
HVAC: Air conditioner, Fan
Telephone: Direct, PABX
FA: Fire Alarm (if necessary)
Section 6 - Employers Rrequirement Specification (E & M) 6- 2- 70
PART II- I.C: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR HYDRO-MECHANICAL WORKS
Table of Contents
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS........................................................................................................................ 72
1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................................. 72
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPONENTS ............................................................................................ 72
2.1 Steel Penstock Pipe ......................................................................................................................... 72
2.2 Base Plates & HDPE sheet ............................................................................................................ 73
3. EXPANSION JOINTS .............................................................................................................................. 73
3.1 Gates and stop logs ......................................................................................................................... 73
4. DESIGN, CALCULATION, DRAWINGS & MANUALS WITH SOFT COPY ................................... 73
4.1 Design and Drawings....................................................................................................................... 73
4.2 Inspection and Test Procedure ...................................................................................................... 74
4.3 Instruction Manuals .......................................................................................................................... 75
5. UNITS AND MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................................... 75
6. PROGRESS .............................................................................................................................................. 75
6.1 Progress Report ............................................................................................................................... 75
6.2 Progress Photos ............................................................................................................................... 76
6.3 Periodic Schedules during Erection .............................................................................................. 77
6.4 Joint Progress Meetings .................................................................................................................. 77
7. PACKING................................................................................................................................................... 77
8. DESIGN AND WORKING STRESSES ................................................................................................. 78
9. GROUNDING ............................................................................................................................................ 79
10. CHANGE OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT .................................................................................... 79
11. LABELS AND PLATES ....................................................................................................................... 79
12. STANDARDS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................... 79
12.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 79
12.2 Standard and Supplemental Specification ............................................................................... 80
12.3 Material Inspection and Testing ................................................................................................. 80
12.4 Shop Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 81
12.5 Castings ......................................................................................................................................... 81
12.6 Forgings ......................................................................................................................................... 81
12.7 Mild Steel Plate, Bars, etc. .......................................................................................................... 81
12.8 Corrosion - Resisting Steel Plate, Bars, Etc. ........................................................................... 82
12.9 Bronze ............................................................................................................................................ 82
12.10 Checkered Plate ........................................................................................................................... 82
Stage- Two Envelope Procurement of works-small contract Single Bidding document of Lower Bom Khola MHP
Section 6 - Employers Rrequirement Specification (HM) 6- 2- 71
12.11 Machine Work ............................................................................................................................... 82

12.12 Miscellaneous materials .............................................................................................................. 83
12.13 Welding .......................................................................................................................................... 83
13. ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND WIRING .......................................................................................... 84
13.1 Motors ............................................................................................................................................ 84
13.2 Motor Brakes ................................................................................................................................. 85
13.3 Electric Cables and Wiring .......................................................................................................... 85
13.4 Motor Starters and Ammeters .................................................................................................... 85
13.5 Conduits ......................................................................................................................................... 85
13.6 Enclosures ..................................................................................................................................... 85
13.7 Convenience Outlets.................................................................................................................... 85
13.8 Limit switches ................................................................................................................................ 86
13.9 Indicating Lights, Instruments and Meters................................................................................ 86
13.10 Lighting Fixtures ........................................................................................................................... 86
13.11 Electrical Relays ........................................................................................................................... 86
13.12 Terminal Strips .............................................................................................................................. 86
14. INDICATING INSTRUMENTS............................................................................................................ 87
15. EQUIPMENT WIRING AND WIRING ACCESSORIES ................................................................. 87
16. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................... 88
17. PROTECTION, CLEANING AND PAINTING .................................................................................. 89
17.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 89
17.2 Surface Preparation ..................................................................................................................... 90
17.3 Application Procedure.................................................................................................................. 90
17.4 Surfaces not to be Painted.......................................................................................................... 90
17.5 Paint Schedule .............................................................................................................................. 90
18. EMBEDDED STEEL WORK, OPENING .......................................................................................... 91
19. ORDERS ISSUED TO SUBCONTRACTORS ................................................................................. 91
20. TESTS.................................................................................................................................................... 92
21. SPARE PARTS..................................................................................................................................... 92
22. MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL TOOLS................................................................. 92
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 Scope of Work
The supply shall include, but not limited to design, manufacture, quality assurance and
delivery to Site, erection, commissioning and guarantee services and remedying of defects
for all equipment as specified in the Technical Specifications.
In addition, the Contractor shall provide training to the Employer's personnel as required, to
establish a well-trained operation and maintenance crew.
If the specifications and/or drawings of these Tender Documents do not contain particulars
of materials or works which are obviously necessary for the proper and safe completion,
operation and maintenance of the equipment in question, all such materials and works shall
be deemed to be included in the supply.
The following equipment which ever applicable as mentioned in Bill of Quantities shall be
supplied under the contract:
1) Side Intake Gate: One complete set of Side Intake Gate with its guide frames and hoists
with their accessories
2) Desander outlet: One complete set of Desander Outlet with its guide frames and hoists
with their accessories
3) Desander Flushing Gates: One complete sets of Desander Flushing Gate with its guide
frames and hoists with their accessories
4) Tailrace Gate: One complete set of Tailrace Gate with its guide frames and hoists with
their accessories
5) Side Intake Trashrack: Three complete sets of side Intake Trashracks with
supporting beams and their accessories
6) Penstock Inlet Valve: One complete set of Penstock Inlet Valve with bypass valve and
their accessories
7) HDPE Headrace Pipe : One Complete Lane of HEPC Headrace Pipe with Saddle base
plates etc. and their accessories all complete.
8) Steel Penstock Pipe: One complete Lane of Steel Penstock Pipe with saddle, base
plates, expansion joints etc and their accessories all complete
The Contract shall also include the supply and installation of all electric and control
equipment associated with the foregoing work. All works shall be in accordance with the
Specification, the accompanied drawings and tender schedules.
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPONENTS

2.1 Steel Penstock Pipe
The water from forebay is conveyed to powerhouse in steel penstock pipe having different
thickness and diameter. Mild steel plates of grade IS 2062-B will be used for the fabrication
of pipe at factory and transported to the site. Support piers are at 4 m interval.
(a) Pipes (b) Bends (c) Expansion joints (d) Base plate (e) Wash hole (f) Stiffener Plates (g)
Anchor ring (h) Strainer Pipe
The diameter of the pipe is determined by optimization of cost. The thickness is calculated
based on to be operated in isolated mode and transients traveling all the way to setting
basin in the long penstock. The opening and closing time of turbine is is considered as 12s.
Anchor ring, strainer pipe and stiffeners are provided inside anchor block and these details
have to be prepared during detail engineering. The detail of pipe weight is presented in
Table below:
2.2 Base Plates & HDPE sheet
The caps of saddles are provided with 4mm thick Mild steel base plates to facilitate the
uniform distribution of load on the bearing area. The base plate will hold pipe at least in 120
degrees at the lower part. The base plate will be anchored in cap concrete with the help of
mild steel bar welded in base plate at the time of laying and fixing. The plate width on saddle
is 0.60m and has curved length of 0.6 m in 300mm dia. pipe.
3. EXPANSION JOINTS
Required number of expansion joints needed as mentioned in the BoQ
3.1 Gates and stop logs
For controlling of discharge, gates are provided at headwork in different locations. There are
two under sluice gates at both rivers. The two intake gates can be used to control the
discharge to the inlet channel. The sealing arrangement consists of seal in gate, skin plate,
back support Rib and roller from back. The minimum skin plate thickness including a
corrosion allowance should be 14 mm. The operating platform is made with 12.5cm slab and
the side channel is extended up facilitating the lifting arrangement.
The side channels in gates are extended up to the top of wall where operating platform is
provided with handle and gear arrangement. The gate is operated by a hoisting mechanism.
Main parts of the gate are side channels, skin plate, front seal, stiffener angles, lifting device
with handle.
4. DESIGN, CALCULATION, DRAWINGS & MANUALS WITH SOFT COPY

4.1 Design and Drawings
Before manufacturing of the equipment and site construction works are to commence, the
design criteria, calculations, dimensioned drawings and diagrams showing all details of the
equipment and materials to be used as well as all arrangement related to other Contractor's
works shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and to the Employer simultaneously.
In any case these drawings shall be submitted in sufficient time allowance to permit
modifications to be made, if such are deemed to be necessary and/or are instructed by the
Engineer, without delaying the completion of the Works. The drawings to be modified as
necessary by the Engineer shall be resubmitted for re-approval.
When the Contractor prepare his construction schedule, as required herein, he shall make
allowance for and indicate, on the schedule, the time for approval of drawings for the
Engineer. A period of at least four weeks should be allowed for such approval and another
one week for return to the project office. Claims or extensions of time will not be permitted
on account of the late submission of drawings to Engineer or for delay caused by drawings
being not approved by the Engineer.
After approval of drawings by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply the approved
drawings to the Employer and the Engineer.
Drawings submitted for reference shall be submitted in the same manner as approved
drawings. Should any modification is required, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to
do so, and the drawings so modified shall be resubmitted for approval.
It shall be understood, however, that approval of the drawings will not exonerate the
Contractor from any responsibility in connection with the work.
All drawings submitted for approval or sent to the Employer or the Engineer for any other
reasons shall be sent by registered air courier to Project office.
The title of the drawing, the signature of the Contractor's responsible engineer, the date
prepared, the number of the drawing, etc. shall appear in the bottom right hand corner of the
drawing. The size of drawings shall be as follows:
(A). A1 (594 mm x 941 mm) (B) A2 (420 mm x 594 mm)
(C ) A3 (297 mm x 420 mm) (D) A4 (210 mm x 297 mm)
After all items of the work have been manufactured and erected, electronic copy of drawings
and calculation sheets as well as As-built Drawings (hard and soft copy) shall be submitted
to the Employer and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit the following approved drawings for all foundations and/or
concrete requirements for all the plant that shall include the location and size of blockouts
and anchor bars to be embedded in the first stage concrete immediately after the Engineer's
approval so as to reach the Engineer within the times stated hereunder, reckoned in
calendar months from the issuance of Letter of Acceptance.
Numbers of drawings to be submitted to the Employer and the Engineer shall be as follows:-
During the course of Construction Work
Drawings for approval 3 sets
Approved drawings and drawings for reference 3 sets
After completion of the work
Complete set of Electronic copy 1 set
Complete sets of As-built Drawing 3 sets
Further copies of particular drawings during the course of construction work are to be
provided if required.
No separate payment will be made for Drawings, Reports, Manuals, etc. and such cost shall
be deemed to be included in the respective unit or lump sum prices in the Price schedule.
4.2 Inspection and Test Procedure
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, during or immediately following the
submission of drawings, inspection and test procedure to be performed during manufacture,
erection and tests on completion. Procedure shall define sequence of inspection and test,
equipment preparation, operation procedures to be followed and, detailed procedure for
conducting the inspection and tests, and moreover shall contain design values, technical
particulars or any other standard data for testing which will be treated as the criteria for
evaluation of each inspection or test. Procedure shall be separately prepared for the
inspection and tests to be performed at the shop and at the Site, and submitted for approval
and distributed in the same manner for drawings as set out in the previous sub clause.
Numbers of procedures to be submitted to the Employer and the Engineer shall be as
follows:
Inspection and tests procedure for approval : 3 sets
Approved Procedure : 3 sets

The cost of the above works shall be included in the Tender Price.
4.3 Instruction Manuals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the instruction manuals concerning
the correct manner of erection for the work as early as possible before dispatch of the Plant
and those for the operation and maintenance not later than six months before Taking over of
the Works, with special references to any recently developed features. Instruction manuals
shall describe in detail erection procedure and use of all erection equipment and
measurement devices. Procedure for assembling, adjusting, operating and dismantling of
each component system and machine shall be described and illustrated.
Maintenance of each component shall be described in detail including the recommended
frequency of inspections and lubrication. The instruction manuals shall include easily
readable diagrammatic drawings of the equipment to facilitate understanding the descriptive
information. The Contractor shall, in preparing the instruction manuals, take into account the
lack of experience and familiarity of the operating personnel with this type of equipment. The
instruction manuals shall include a complete list of all drawings prepared for this Contract,
spare parts list, and a parts list for each component of item of equipment. The parts list shall
include manufacturer's code and serial numbers and ordering instructions and shall be
detailed as far as possible for only the equipment supplied.
Number of manuals to be submitted to the Employer and the Engineer shall be as follows:
Manuals for approval 3 sets
Approved manuals 5 sets
The cost of the above works shall be included in the Tender Price.
5. UNITS AND MEASUREMENT

In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings metric units of
measurement shall be employed. On drawings or printed pamphlets where other units have
been used, the equivalent metric measurement shall be marked in addition.
6. PROGRESS
6.1 Progress Report
The Contractor shall, before the seventh (7) day of each calendar month and quarter submit
two (2) copies of monthly progress report and quarterly progress report in a format
acceptable to the Engineer detailing the progress of the work accomplished during the
preceding month and quarter. The report shall contain but are not limited to the following:
(a) A general description of the work performed during the reporting period on each
maintenance activity to include any notable problems which were encountered.
(b) The total overall percentages of project works completed as well as scheduled by the
CPM network as of the end of the reporting period, with appropriate comments in writing to
explain any differences.
(c) The percentages of each maintenance work activity completed as well as scheduled
during the month or quarter, with appropriate comments in writing to explain any differences.
(d) A list of all activities of scheduled progress or actual progress during the reporting period
including the Contractor's actual or forecast start date versus scheduled start date, and the
actual or forecast completion date versus scheduled completion date for each activity, with
appropriate remarks in writing to explain any differences.
(e) In case of monthly report, a list of activities scheduled to be started within the next 2
months, with expected starting and completion dates. If the expected starting and/or
completion dates are different from those shown on the CPM Network, an explanation is to
be given.
(f) A list of local manpower (by trade classification) employed during the reporting period.
(g) a list of expatriate personnel (by position) employed during the reporting periods.
(h) A list of the Contractor's Equipment and materials presently located at the Site. Also a
list of equipment and material which are arriving at the very near future.
(i) Photographs of the type called for in Sub clause (2) herein under.
(j) Total quantities of concrete poured, fill materials placed, excavation, etc, during the
reporting period.
(k) Main items of temporary facilities constructed during the reporting period.
(l) A statement detailing the status of progress on the overall program and how to regain any
lost time or set -backs which may have occurred.
(m) A listing of dead (inoperable) equipment, action being taken to get it back in operation
and the estimated date for the repairs will be completed.
(n) A statement about labor relations and an explanation of any actual or potential
problems.
(o) A listing of each accident involving the hospitalization and/or death of any person.
(p) A statement concerning the effectiveness of the security program and a listing of any
major thefts.
(q) A listing of the amount and date of each payment received as of the reporting period
and the amount of any monthly invoice which has been submitted but not yet paid.
(r) A list of claims (if any) submitted during the reporting period to include claim amounts on
cost and extension of time.
(s) A statement concerning foreseeable problem areas and recommendations about how
they should be resolved.
The cost of the above works shall be deemed to be included in the Tender Price.
6.2 Progress Photos
The Contractor shall, throughout the Contractual period, submit to the Engineer progress
color photographs which clearly show the work progress being made. The photographs shall
be taken at the start, during and at the completion of each major component of the work and
at other times and places as directed by the Engineer. The photographs to be submitted to
the Engineer shall be attached to the monthly progress report specified in this Clause (1) (i)
hereinabove.
A brief description of the subject and date taken will be listed for each photograph, the size
of post card. If additional prints are required by the Engineer or the Employer, the Contractor
shall submit them. The cost of such photographs shall not be paid separately and shall be
deemed to be included in the Contract Price.
The negatives of the photographs shall be the property of the Employer and no print from
these negatives shall be supplied to any person unless so authorized by the Employer.
Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor shall submit all of the negatives to the
Employer in a booklet form arranged chronologically and marked for identification. The
Contractor shall also submit three (3) sets, of color photographs adequately edited and in a
booklet form showing the entire sequence of the work from start to finish.
6.3 Periodic Schedules during Erection
(a) Daily Work Schedule
The Contractor shall at the end of each day submit two (2) copies of a written daily
schedule, in a form approved by the Engineer, for the Main work items which are the work
progress executed and the works to be performed during the successive day. The schedule
shall contain appropriate comments in regard to the work which is to be performed on each
major activity.
(b) Weekly Work Schedule
The Contractor shall at the end of each week submit three (3) copies of a written weekly
schedule listing the Main work items which are to be accomplished during the successive
week. The schedule shall be in a format approved by the Engineer and is to contain
appropriate comments in regard to the work which is to be performed on major items. One
page of the schedule shall list each day of the week.
(c) Monthly Work Schedule
The Contractor shall at the end of each month submit three (3) copies of a monthly bar chart
type of schedule to show the work which is proposed to be accomplished during the
successive month. This schedule will show, by means of bars, the days within the month
which each Main activity will be worked on. The schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer
by the first day of each month for his review and comments.
6.4 Joint Progress Meetings
A regular meeting between the key personnel of the Engineer and the Contractor shall be
held once a week or fortnight at a time agreed by both parties. The purpose of these
meetings will be to discuss the progress being made, the work proposed for the forthcoming
week and any problems having a direct bearing on the immediate to near-term work
activities. The Employer may attend such meetings or hold separate meetings whenever
necessary.
7. PACKING
The whole of the Plant shall be packed or bundled properly so that no damage shall be
sustained during transportation to the Site and by rough handling. For the transport of unit
pipes for penstock and headrace steel pipe nesting of unit pipes shall be allowed. The
contents of packing cases shall be securely bolted or fastened in position with struts or
cross battens. Cases shall be opened after packing to prove no movement of the contents.
Wood wool shall not be allowed for packing purposes.
Waterproof papers and felt linings shall overlap at seams and the seams secured together in
an adequate manner, but the enclosure shall be provided with screened openings to obtain
ventilation.
All cases, packages, bundles, etc., shall bear at least the identification mark relating to the
appropriate shipping documents, the contents and total weight.
Such shipping marks on the outside of casing or on the metal tags attached to bundles shall
be protected by shellac or varnish to prevent obliteration in transit.
Each case, package or bundle shall contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope and
copies in triplicate shall be forwarded to the Engineer prior to dispatch. All items of materials
shall be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing list.
The Engineer reserves the right to inspect and approve the packing before the items are
dispatched but the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that the packing is
suitable for transit and such inspection will not exonerate the Contractor from any loss or
damage due to faulty packing.
Shipping mark shall consist of the following information in sequence and in frame
commensurate with the size of container:
(a) Consignee
(b) Contract No : ------------------------------------
(c) Destination :
(d) Item number (if applicable)
Package number in sequence,
and quantity per package:
(e) Description of Contracts
(f) Net and gross weight,
Cubic measurement
8. DESIGN AND WORKING STRESSES

The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that they will not suffer
damage under the most adverse conditions nor result in deflections and vibrations which
might adversely affect the operation of the equipment. Mechanisms shall be so constructed
to avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion.
All parts, which will have to be dismantled or which might have to be dismantled for the
purpose of servicing or replacement, shall be retained with anti-corrosive fasteners. The
type, material and size of all fasteners shall be selected to safely withstand the maximum
superimposed direct, alternating, kinetic and thermal loads and all loads included by
workman when installing or removing the fasteners during the life of the equipment.
The design shall be such that the installation, replacement and general Maintenance may be
undertaken with the minimum of time and expense. The tolerances used for dimensions and
finishes shall be selected with due consideration to the particular properties and functions of
the parts and the corresponding accuracy required to obtain proper operation and tight
sealing.
Wherever possible, all similar parts, including spare parts, shall be made to gauge and
interchangeable. Such parts shall be of the same materials and workmanship and shall be
constructed to such tolerances as to enable substitution or replacement from spare parts to
be made easily and quickly.
Suitable structural steel bases or frames shall be provided where necessary to transmit to
the concrete foundations all loads imposed by the various parts of the equipment. Such
bases or frames shall be supplied complete with suitable anchor bolts and shall be so
proportioned that the bearing loads imposed on the concrete foundations will not exceed 50
kgf per square centimeter.
All plant shall be designed to minimize the risk of fire and consequential damage, to prevent
ingress of vermin, dust and dirt, and accidental contact with electrically energized or moving
parts. The plant shall be capable of continuous operation with minimum attention and
Project attendance in the exceptionally severe conditions.
Upon request by the Engineer complete information regarding the design assumptions,
loading and operating conditions, deflections and unit stresses used in the design shall be
provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined the specifications and drawings herewith
and unless stated specifically, to have concurred with the design and layout of the works as
being sufficient to ensure reliability and safety in operation, freedom from undue stresses,
adequate drainage and other essentials for a satisfactory working plant.
It should be noted that the Specification Drawings shown only the general type of equipment
and the governing dimensions and are not intended to define the exact details of the
equipment to be furnished. Alternative details and arrangement will be considered. The
drawings indicate the outline of the structure in which the equipment is to be installed. Any
recesses required in this structure for alignment and grouting of embedded parts shall be
determined by the Contractor.
9. GROUNDING
All electric equipment in the Plant shall be substantially grounded to the grounding system
comprising Main grids and stubs to be installed by the other Contractor. Grounding wiring
and connections from the equipment to the ground stubs shall be provided by the
Contractor. Adequate size of copper grounding conductors, based on the maximum ground
fault current and the protection in the circuit shall be used, but the minimum size shall be
100 square millimeters, and where possible, shall run inside the conduits with power
conductors.
10. CHANGE OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall not make any changes to the equipment or in the materials to be
incorporated in the equipment from that specified or implied by these Specifications without
the written approval of the Engineer. Such changes or alterations shall in no way be
detrimental to the interest of the Employer and shall not result in any increase to the
Contract Sum.
11. LABELS AND PLATES

All duty labels, data, name plates and instruction plates on cubicles and equipment shall be
in English.
12. STANDARDS AND WORKMANSHIP

12.1 General
All materials shall be new, the best of their kinds and of such as are usual and suitable for
work of like character.
All workmanship shall be of the highest class throughout to ensure smooth and vibration
free operation under all possible operating conditions, and the design, dimensions and
materials of all parts shall be such that the stresses to which they may be subjected shall
not render them liable to distortion, undue wear, or damage under the most severe
conditions encountered in service.
All parts shall conform to the dimensions shown on and shall be built in accordance with
approved drawings. All joints, datum surfaces, and mating components shall be machined
and all castings shall be spot faced for nuts. All machined finishes shall be shown on the
approved drawings. All screws bolts, studs and nuts and threads for pipes shall conform to
the latest standards of the International Organization for Standardization covering these
components and shall conform to the standards for metric size.
12.2 Standard and Supplemental Specification
All workmanship, materials and equipment where applicable and unless otherwise stated in
the Contract Document shall comply either:
- With the relevant American, British, German, Japanese, and Indian Standards or Codes of
Practice current on the data fixed for receipt of tenders, or
- with other standards or codes of Practice proposed by Contractor at the time of tendering,
provided that those Standards or codes of Practice are equivalent or superior to the relevant
American, British, German, Japanese and Indian Standards or Code or Practice.
If the Tender Documents conflict in any way with any or all of the above standards or codes,
the tender documents shall have precedence and shall govern.
12.3 Material Inspection and Testing
Materials, parts and assemblies thereof, entering into the Work shall be tested, unless
otherwise directed, according to the best commercial method for the particular type and
class of work. When the manufacturer desires to use stock material not manufactured
specifically for the equipment furnished, satisfactory evidence that such material conforms to
the requirements herein stated, shall be furnished, in which case tests on these materials
may be waived. Certified mill test reports of plates and sections will be acceptable. In
addition to the mechanical tests required by the Specifications, all materials shall be
examined in the shop for laminations and imperfections before incorporating them into the
work and any defective material shall be rejected.
Witness tests and inspection of material may be made at the place of manufacture by an
Inspector appointed by the Engineer, unless otherwise specified. Such witnessing and
inspecting will be conducted so as to interfere as little as possible with manufacturing
operation. The Contractor shall however comply with any reasonable request made by the
Inspector concerning the method of test or correction of defective workmanship.
All castings weighing 226.8 kilograms or more shall have test coupons attached from which
test specimens may be prepared. The number, size and location of the test coupons shall
be to the approval of the Engineer. Faulty material or materials found to be inferior to that
specified shall be rejected and removed at once, and shall not be used in any part of the
work.
Test pieces of other structural materials shall be provided as required by the Engineer.
The ultimate strength, limit of elasticity, ductility, hardness, etc., will be determined from
such test pieces.
The Contractor shall furnish, free of charge, all test pieces, blankets, etc., cut and machined
to the sizes, shapes and dimensions as directed by the Engineer. The testing of the
specimens will be carried out by the Contractor at his own expense, and shall be performed
as directed by the Engineer.
Test pieces which represent rejected material shall be preserved and become the property
of the Employer. Copies of all test reports shall be Mail unlined to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer and the Inspector, as requested, certified test
reports giving the chemical analysis and physical properties of materials used.
Waving of inspection by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
supplying material and workmanship acceptable to the Engineer.
12.4 Shop Assembly
All items of equipment shall be assembled in the shop prior to shipment and tests shall be
performed by the Contractor as may be required to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Engineer the adequacy of the equipment and its component parts. All tests should be
simulated normal operating conditions as closely as possible. All dismantled parts shall be
properly match marked and dowelled to ensure correct assembly in the field.
12.5 Castings
All castings shall be dense, sound and true to pattern, of workmanlike finish and of uniform
quality and condition, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks or
other injurious defects, and shall be satisfactorily cleaned for their intended purpose.
All castings shall be checked for defects before final machining. Castings shall not be
repaired, plugged, or welded without permission of the Engineer. Such permission will be
given only when the defects are small and do not adversely affect the strength, use or
machinability of the castings. Excessive segregation of impurities or alloys at critical points
in a casting will be cause for its rejection. The largest fillets compatible with the design shall
be incorporated wherever a change in section occurs.
Surfaces which do not undergo machining and are exposed in the final installation shall be
dressed to provide a satisfactory appearance so that they will not require surface smoothing
at site prior to painting.
Iron Castings, Steel casting with fully annelid, bronze casting, phosphor bronze castings
shall be in accordance with acceptable standard
12.6 Forgings
Forgings shall be in accordance with General acceptable standard. The ingots from which
the forging are made shall be cast in metal moulds, the workmanship shall be first-class in
every respect and the forging shall be free from all defects affecting their strength and
durability, including seams, pipes, flaws, cracks, scales, fins, porosity, hard spots, excessive
nonmetallic inclusions and segregation.
The largest fillets compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a change in
section occurs. All finished surfaces or forging shall be smooth and free from tool marks.
12.7 Mild Steel Plate, Bars, etc.
Steel plates for gates, valves and pipe lines and Steel plates for trash racks and structural
steel shall be constructed of material according to acceptable standard. Steel bolts, nuts and
washers, high-strength steel bolts, nuts and washers for friction grip joint and lock washers
shall be in accordance with acceptable standards.
12.8 Corrosion - Resisting Steel Plate, Bars, Etc.

Corrosion-resisting steel and bars shall be in accordance with acceptable standard.
12.9 Bronze
Bronze for bushings, bearings and thrust discs shall be in accordance with acceptable
standard specification. Bronze for other purposes shall meet with the approval of the
Engineer.
12.10 Checkered Plate
Checkered plate shall be of an approved raised pattern. All edges of plate shall be planed
and joints shall be cut so as to Maintain continuity of pattern.
12.11 Machine Work
(i) General
All tolerances, allowances and gauges for metal fits between plain cylindrical parts shall
conform to the acceptable standard or other approved equivalent Standards for the class of
fit as shown or otherwise required. Sufficient machining stock shall be allowed on locating
pads to ensure true surfaces of solid material,. Bearing surfaces shall be true and exact to
secure full contact. Journal and sliding surfaces shall be polished and all surfaces shall be
finished with sufficient smoothness and accuracy to ensure proper operation when
assembled. Parts entering any machine shall be carefully and accurately machined. All
drilled holes for bolts shall be accurately located and drilled from templates.
(ii) Finished Surfaces
Surface finish shall be indicated on the Contractor's drawings and shall be in accordance
with the acceptable standards. Compliance with specified surface will be determined by
sense or feel and by visual inspection of the work compared to standard roughness
specimens, in accordance with the provisions of the above stated standards.
(iii) Unfinished Surfaces
So far as is practicable, all work shall be arranged to obtain proper machining of adjoining
unfinished surfaces. When there is a large discrepancy between adjoining unfinished
surfaces, they shall be chipped and ground smooth, or machined, to secure proper
alignment. Unfinished surfaces shall be true to the lines and dimensions shown on the
drawings and shall be chipped or ground free of all projections and rough spots.
Depressions or holes not affecting the strength or usefulness of the parts may be filled in an
approved manner.
(iv) Keys and Keyways
Keys and keyways shall conform to the requirements of acceptable stqandard, unless
otherwise specified or required.
(v) Pins and Pin Holes
Pin holes shall be bored to gauge, smooth and straight, and at right angles to the axis of the
member. The boring shall be done after the member is securely fastened in position. Pins
shall be of hardened and ground steel and positively held in position. Wheels or rollers for
use in gates shall be mounted on removable pins and have self-lubricating bushings and
brass washers.
(vi) Lubrication
Before assembly, all bearing surfaces, journals, and grease and oil grooves shall be
carefully cleaned and lubricated with an approved oil or grease. After assembly, each
lubricating system shall be filled with an approved lubricant. Self-lubricating bearing shall be
cleaned with clean rags, and grease with an approved lubricant before assembly. Solvent
shall not be used on the self-lubricating bearings. The specification of all approved
lubrications will be mentioned in the operating and Maintenance instructions.
(vii) Balancing
All revolving parts shall be truly balanced both statically and dynamically so that when
running at normal speeds and at any load up to the maximum, there shall be no vibration
due to lack of such balance and the plant shall operate with the least possible amount of
noise.
12.12 Miscellaneous materials
(i) Self-lubricating bearing and Galvanized stranded wire ropes shall be in accordance with
acceptable standards. Wire rope fittings shall be the manfacturer's standard fittings for the
type of wire rope used. Cable and conduit fittings, rigid steel conduit and zinc coated conduit
shall be in accordance with acceptable standards.
(ii) Rubber gate seals shall be molded from a high-grade, tread type compound. The basic
polymer shall be natural rubber, a co-polymer of butadience and styrene, or a blend or both.
The compound shall contain not less than 70 per cent by volume of the basic polymer, and
the remainder shall consist of reinforcing carbon black, zinc-oxide accelerators, antioxidants,
vulcanizing agents and/or plasticizers. The compound shall have the following physical
properties.
Property Limits
Tensile strength 210 kgf/cm2 minimum
Ultimate Elongation 450% minimum
Durometer Hardness (shore type A) 50 to 70
Sp. gravity 1.1 to 1.3
Water absorption (70oC for 48 hrs) 5% maximum by weight
Compression set (as a percent 30% maximum
of total original deflection)
Tensile strength after oxygen 80% minimum. of tensile strength
bumb aging for 48 hrs at 70oC before aging.
12.13 Welding
All welding shall be done either manually by the shielded metallic arc process or
automatically by the shielded arc or submerged arc method.
The Contractor shall submit a welding procedure for the approval of the Engineer. After the
welding procedure has been approved, the Contractor shall record it on a special drawing
which shall thereupon become one of the drawings of the Contract. Weld sizes and types
shall be shown on all Contractor's drawings where welding is required.
Radiographic inspection shall be carried out by the Contractor when required by the
standards, these specifications of the design criteria employed. All important welds which, in
the opinion of the Engineer, may be subject to the full stress induced in the adjacent plate,
or which in the opinion of the Engineer or Inspector, do not appear to conform to the welding
standards, shall be radio-graphed when required by the Engineer.
Suitable meters shall be provided to show the welding current and the arc voltage at all
times during the welding operations. Unless otherwise specifically stated, welded parts
requiring machine finished shall be completely welded before being finished. Plates to be
joined by welding shall be accurately cut to size and rolled by pressure to the proper
curvature which shall be continuous from the edge. Flattening in the curvature along the
edges with correction by blows will not be allowed. The dimensions and shape of the edge
to be joined shall be such as to allow thorough fusion and complete penetration and the
edges of plates shall be properly formed to accommodate the various welding conditions.
The surfaces of the plates for a distance of 25 millimeters from the edge to be welded shall
be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, grease and scale, to bright metal.
(i) Qualification of Welding Procedure
The technique of welding employed, the appearance and quality of the welds made and the
methods used in correcting defective work, shall conform to acceptable standards.
(ii) Qualification of Welders and Welding Operators
All welders and welding operators assigned to the work shall have passed a qualification
test, within the preceding six months, for welders and welding operators, in accordance with
acceptable standards. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with certified copies of
reports of the results of physical tests of specimens welded in the qualification tests. If, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the work of any welder at any time appears questionable, he
shall be required to pass the appropriate prequalification test. All costs of qualification tests
shall be borne by the Contractor.
(iii) Welding Electrodes
The weld electrodes shall conform to acceptable standards. Stainless type weld metal,
where used in the water passages for protection against pitting, shall be of chromium nickel
steel. The type, chemical composition and number of welding rods for this purpose shall
meet with the approval of the Engineer.
(iv) Test after Welding
All the welded portion shall be tested by X-ray test or dye-penetration test or ultrasonic test
for defects when and where required as per decision of the Engineer.
13. ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND WIRING

13.1 Motors
The motors shall be of horizontal shaft, high starting torque, low starting current, squirrel
cage, induction type, designed for full voltage starting, weatherproof and totally enclosed.
Wound rotor motors will be accepted only if a squirrel cage type would not be satisfactory for
the duty.
The motors shall have class E insulation and continuous rating at 35 degree centigrade
ambient temperature. Motor lead insulation shall be class E and cable terminal boxes shall
be provided preferably with stud - type connectors.
The capacity of motor shall be more than 100 per cent against the value calculated from the
most adverse combination of loads, which will occur during opening and closing operation of
the gate. The starting and maximum torque of motor shall be more than 200 and less than
300 per cent of its rated torque respectively.
Windings and connections shall be suitable impregnated to render them moisture proof, non
hygroscopic and unaffected by conducting dust.
All motor bearing shall be of the ball or roller type with an inner grease seal to prevent
grease entering the winding. Bearing housing shall be fitted with a "ball in head" grease
fitting and a removable plug for the escape of grease.
13.2 Motor Brakes
The brakes mounted on motors shall be of spring-applied and A.C solenoid released type.
The rated capacity shall not be less than 150 per cent of the rated full load torque of the
motor. The brake shall be arranged for automatic application, when the motor power supply
is cut off, and release when the motor is energized. The brake enclosure shall be weather
proof with convenient access for Maintenance operation.
13.3 Electric Cables and Wiring
The Contractor shall be responsible for wiring, laying and furnishing of control and power
cables and/or wires which are necessary for the required operation. All the power cables for
the Equipment or plants shall be of armord types.
All wiring in the control cabinets shall be with PVC insulated stranded conductor, formed
neatly into groups and properly supported. There shall be no splices in the wires or cables
and all connections shall be made only at terminal blocks or studs.
All external wiring between the control cubicles, motors, limit switches, etc., shall be with
multicore copper, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, 600 volt grade jacket type cable.
13.4 Motor Starters and Ammeters
All starters shall be suitable for direct-on-line starting of motors, provided with 3 phase
induction type over current relays for overload phenomenon with manual resetting, open-
phase relays and undervoltage release feature. Overcurrent relays shall be field adjustable
to be rated full load currents of motors. Backup protection shall be provided with high
rupturing capacity enclosed fuses or molded case circuit breakers. The control voltage shall
be 230 volt. AC.
All motors shall be provided with disconnect switches or quickbreak no-fuse circuit breakers
with operating handles lockable in "off" position" They shall be rated to interrupt the full load
current of motor or other equipment in the circuit.
13.5 Conduits
Rigid steel conduit shall be galvanized. It shall be of a minimum thickness of 2.3 millimeters
and have a minimum inside diameter of 16 millimeters.
13.6 Enclosures
Motor enclosures shall be weatherproof and totally enclosed. Enclosures for all other
equipment shall in general be dust proof, weatherproof and vermin proof where required.
Enclosures, trim and doors shall be coated with two coats of a suitable primer and finished
with enamel paint, the colour of which will be decided by the Employer.
13.7 Convenience Outlets
Convenience outlets shall be of 2-pin with scraping earth or 3-pin type rated for 15 amps at
230 volts, suitable for English pattern plug used inside the power plant. Outlets shall be in
weatherproof enclosure or suitably protected from weather.
13.8 Limit switches

The limit switches shall have weatherproof enclosures and shall be mounted suitable for
easy adjustment and for rigidly locking in position after being adjusted. They shall be of
heavy-duty rating and shall have stainless steel rotating parts and permanently lubricated
bearings. They shall allow the arm to be fully deflected by the operator without damage to
the switch.
13.9 Indicating Lights, Instruments and Meters
All indicating lights shall be of filament with colored plastic lenses type for long life and
service under conditions of shock, vibration and rough handling.
All instruments and meters shall have approximately 110 millimeters dial, shall be of heavy-
duty, industrial type suitable for extreme shock and severe vibration applications.
13.10 Lighting Fixtures
The lighting fixtures shall be complete with lamps. Fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be
equipped with complete fittings for A-C, 230-volt, 50 Hz source and a ballast or ballast of
high power factor.
Incandescent lighting fixtures shall have lamp holders in accordance with the local
standards.
The lighting fixtures for outdoor use shall be weatherproof type.
Special care shall be exercised on selection of fixtures so that illumination of the lamps is
not obstructed by accumulation of insects and dust.
13.11 Electrical Relays
Electrical relays for controls and auxiliary relays for protection circuits shall be of the plug-in
type and the plug-in connections shall be made and broken by pressure contacts.
Alternatively, the Engineer may approve the use of plug-in trays containing groups of relays.
Relays shall be provided with non-flammable dust and moisture proof cases.
Relay contacts shall be adequately rated for the service conditions. Relay coils shall be
continuously rated whether the control scheme requires them to be continuously energized
or not.
At least one spare normally opened contact and one spare normally closed contact shall be
provided on each relay in addition to the contact required by the control scheme.
13.12 Terminal Strips
Terminal strips shall be of double stud and 2-hole solid link design with the studs moulded
into an insulating base. Pinch-type terminal blocks and slotted links are not acceptable.
Studs shall be of brass and 6 mm diameter except that studs of 4.7 mm diameter in
stainless steel or phosphor-bronze may be approved.
Terminal strips shall be arranged in vertical rows not less than 225 mm above floor level.
Sufficient terminals shall be provided on each item of equipment to permit the connection of
all incoming cable cores plus 10 per cent spare terminals.
Removable transparent insulating covers shall be provided over all terminals. An insulating
barrier shall be provided between adjacent pairs of studs.
14. INDICATING INSTRUMENTS

Instruments shall be capable of withstanding or shall be adequately protected from the
vibrations which are encountered in service. Instruments and associated apparatus shall be
capable of Maintaining their accuracy and sensitivity without excessive Maintenance.
Instruments on panels shall be flush mounted and provided with narrow bezels. The bezels
shall have a uniform high grade finish.
All instrument cases shall be dust-proof.
All instruments scales shall be of wide angle type clearly printed in black figures and
divisions on a white background. The quantity measured shall be clearly marked on the
instrument dial in black capital letters. The names or titles of the instrument manufacturers
and other printing which may interfere with the clear observation of the reading shall not be
printed on the dials. However, initials or similar markings may be shown un-obstructively as
approved.
Drawings showing in detail all markings to be made on the dial shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
Unless otherwise specified or approved all instruments shall have circular scales with a total
pointer deflection of not less than 240 degrees. Normal working indication shall be at a point
corresponding to approximately 75 per cent of full scale deflection. Scales shall be provided
with red-coloured marks at points corresponding to the normal working values (or full-load
current of the equipment in the case of ammeters) and as approved.
The scales for ammeters in motor circuits shall be compressed so that 20 per cent of full
scale deflection (F.S.D) occurs at about 40 per cent full load current (F.L.C.) and 90 per cent
of F.S.D. at about 120 per cent F.L.C. The scale shall be approximately linear in the range
40 per cent to 120 per cent and compressed above 90 per cent F.S.D. to indicate 6 times
F.L.C. at 100 per cent F.S.D.
Devices for routine checking, zero adjustment and re-calibration shall be easily accessible
from the front of the panels. Where such devices are not included in the instrument case,
they shall be flush mounted on the panels adjacent to the associated instruments, so that
adjustments can be made conveniently while watching the indicator.
If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit samples of instruments to the
15. EQUIPMENT WIRING AND WIRING ACCESSORIES

This clause applies to all connections within equipment enclosures and all interpanel wiring
working at voltages not greater than 400 V nominal. All wiring shall be carried out in
accordance with wiring diagrams so that the arrangement of the wiring is consistent
throughout the plant and identical for those parts of the plant performing the same duties.
Wiring diagrams shall be drawn as seen from the back (i.e., wiring side) of the panel (except
for front connected equipment) and shall show all terminals on selector switches, relays,
contactors, terminal blocks, etc. in their correct relative positions. Terminal blocks shall be
shown arrange in vertical rows and all wiring to those blocks shall be arranged to run in
numerical order from top to bottom.
Wiring shall be neatly and securely bunched or cleated, and enclosed in ducts, or conduits
or supported on trays and run in the most efficient manner from point to point. The bunching
of wiring shall be kept in bunched condition by means of strips of special plastic ribbon
material at suitable intervals. Lacing of wire bunches with textile or plastic cord or metal
buckle type clips will not be accepted. Wherever wiring is cleated to metal work, it shall be
insulated from the metal surface and shall be cleated by means of insulated straps in an
approved manner. All wiring shall be left sufficiently long and neatly looped to allow a fresh
termination to be made should the original termination device break off.
Circuits of similar nature shall be grouped together and terminal blocks terminals in A.C.
circuits with voltage above 110V shall be segregated and fully shrouded to prevent
accidental contact with live parts.
All secondary wiring under the contract shall employ conductors of minimum cross-section
2.0 square millimeters with not less than seven strands of tinned copper wire. Internal wiring
of miniaturized and solid state equipment may use flexible conductors having a minimum
size of 50/0.18 mm where wiring is made off to clamping type terminals and 30/0.18 mm
where the termination is made by soldering.
Current transformer secondary circuits shall be run with the conductor route length as short
as possible. The burden of the leads associated with current transformers and protective
relays shall be sufficiently low to ensure correct operation of the protection under all
conditions and this may require a cross section of conductor greater than 2.0 square
millimeters.
Insulation shall be PVC of 250 V or higher grade appropriate to the service conditions and
shall be self-coloured in accordance with a code which is the same for all of the plant. The
Contractor shall submit the colour code to the Engineer for approval and shall make such
changes in the code as are required to achieve consistency with other Contractors and with
the Employer's standards.
Each end of each wire shall be provided with an approved termination and with a numbered
ferrule. Wire numbers shall be allocated by the Contractor and shown on the Contractor's
final circuit diagrams forwarded for approval.
If required by the Engineer, samples of the secondary wiring, terminations and terminal
blocks shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval before the work is carried out.
16. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Prior to any of the work being energized, the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying
and fixing in prominent positions near to each item of the Work concerned, large multilingual
temporary signs giving clear warning of danger in areas which might previously have been
regarded as safe.
During erection, the Contractor shall provide all temporary scaffolding, ladders, platforms
with toe boards and handrails essential for safe and convenient access of workmen,
inspector and other authorized persons employed about the Works. All dangerous opening
or holes in floors shall be provided with handrails or cover; preventative measures shall be
taken to protect workmen from falling materials.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of his employees and to
other persons on the site appropriate to the nature of the work and conditions prevailing at
the site. The Contractor shall comply with all statutory requirements and with such directions
as the Engineer may from time to time consider necessary or desirable. Safety precautions
shall include, but not be limited to adequate life protection and lifesaving equipment,
adequate illumination for night operations, adequate ventilating equipment for enclosed
places, instructions in accident prevention to all employees, including where necessary care
in the use of explosives, adequate traffic control, such machinery guards, safe walkways,
handrails, scaffolds, ladders, bridges, gang planks and other safety devices, equipment and
apparel as are necessary to prevent accidents, injuries or fires, and adequate facilities for
the proper inspection and Maintenance of all safety measures.
The maximum possible safety must be afforded to personnel directly engaged on this
contract or those who frequent the working area or those who in the normal course of their
occupation find it necessary to utilize temporary works erected by the Contractor.
17. PROTECTION, CLEANING AND PAINTING

17.1 General
All parts which will ultimately be buried in concrete shall be cleaned and protected, before
leaving the manufacturer's shop, by a cement wash or other approved method. Before being
installed, they shall be thoroughly descaled and cleaned of all rust and adherent matter.
Such cleaning shall not detrimentally affect the strength or final operation and function of the
equipment.
All machine parts of bearing surfaces shall be cleaned and protected from corrosion, before
leaving the manufacturer's shop, by the application of an approved rust preventive lacquer,
or a peelable plastic film. Where the latter is impracticable such parts shall be heavily
covered with high melting point grease. After erection such parts shall be cleaned with
solvent and lapped or polished bright.
All parts, other than machined parts, which will be exposed after erection shall be thoroughly
cleaned and protected, before leaving the manufacturer's shop by an approved method and
procedure.
Primer shall be applied to surfaces prepared in accordance with the paint manufacturer's
instructions. The surface shall be wiped clean immediately prior to applying the paint. The
primer and finish coats of paint shall be applied using the methods and equipment
recommended by the manufacturer.
The paint system selected, except for the inside surface of the steel pipe, shall have a
proven life expectancy of not less than ten years in the atmosphere prevailing at this Project.
The internal surface of all pipe lines shall be cleaned out by approved methods before
installation and again prior to commissioning, to ensure freedom from dirt, rust, scale,
welding slag etc. The code system shall be approved by the Engineer.
The finish colour of all equipment shall be approved by the Employer and Engineer but the
Contractor shall propose a colour scheme for the equipment and shall submit colour chips or
paint samples. A colour chip shall be included with the approved colour schedule, for each
type of finish to be applied at the Site.
The painting of metal work shall include the preparation of the metal surfaces, paint
application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, as well as the supplying of all tools,
labours and materials necessary for the entire painting work.
Sufficient paint shall be provided for field painting and touch-up of shop painting by the
Contractor.
Paint shall be the product of reputable manufacturer and its selection shall be approved by
the Engineer.
17.2 Surface Preparation

All oil, paraffin, grease and dirt shall be removed from the surfaces to be painted by using
solvents. Following solvent cleaning, all weld spatter, slag, burrs, loose rust and mill scale
and other foreign substances shall be removed by sandblasting to "near-white" metal. The
interior surface of the steel pipe shall be mechanically cleaned or sandblasted to a
commercial standard. Special attention shall be given to cleaning of corners and converging
angles. If rust forms or the surface become contaminated in the interval between cleaning
and painting, re-cleaning to the same degree shall be required. Surfaces not to be painted
shall be protected by appropriate and adequate masking during the cleaning and painting of
adjacent metal work. Effective means shall be provided for removing all free oil and moisture
from the air supply lines of blasting equipment. All surface preparation shall be subject to
approval of the Engineer before any paint is applied.
17.3 Application Procedure
All paint, when applied, shall provide a satisfactory film and a smooth, even surface. Paint
shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at the uniform consistency during application.
No painting work shall be performed under the conditions of it being extremely high or low
atmospheric temperature or high humidity of the air or there being some fear of its raining
before drying of applied paints. Surfaces shall be free from moisture at the time of painting.
Painting shall be performed by brushing or spraying. The first coat shall be applied
immediately after surface preparation. Each coat shall be allowed to dry or harden
thoroughly before the succeeding coat is applied.
17.4 Surfaces not to be Painted
Bronze, brass, surfaces or gear teeth, finished ferrous surfaces, surfaces in rolling or sliding
contact after field assembly and hoist ropes shall not be painted.
All corrosion resisting steel surfaces for bearings and machinery parts shall not be painted.
On completion of cleaning, the surfaces shall be coated with an adhesive plastic film to
protect the surfaces from minor mechanical damage and corrosion during shipment and
storage at the site. The film shall be stripped off immediately prior to field erection of the
equipment.
17.5 Paint Schedule
The painting shall be performed as follows:
(i) One primer coat and three coats of coal-tar epoxy resin paint, final total thickness of 450
micron minimum shall be applied to the following items:
- Interior surfaces of steel penstock
- Exposed surfaces of Drain Pipes and Valves.
- Interior surfaces of Drain Pipe and Valves.
- Exterior or exposed surface of penstock and steel pipe
The surfaces to be painted shall be descaled and cleaned by blast cleaning to near white.
(ii) One primer coat and four coats of epoxy resin paint, final total thickness of 250 micron
minimum shall be applied to the following items:
- Exposed surfaces of all guide frames
- All gate
- All trash racks

- Exposed surfaces valves.
- all stoplogs
The surfaces to be painted shall be descaled and cleaned by blast cleaning to near white.
(iii) All unfinished surfaces of ferrous metal except those specified above shall be given one
primer coat and three coats of oil resistant alkyed paint. Final total thickness of these coats
including primer coat shall be 150 micron minimum. The surfaces to be painted shall be
cleaned by hand tool or power tool cleaning to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(iv) Commercial equipment shall be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's standard
practice.
All finish surfaces of ferrous metals including screw threads that will be exposed during
transportation or while awaiting installation shall be cleaned and given a heavy uniform
coating of gasoline soluble, rust preventive compound.
18. EMBEDDED STEEL WORK, OPENING

Unless otherwise specified, any foundations, walls and roof openings and coverings,
concrete floor filling and sleeves in the foundations and walls related to civil works only will
be provided by the other Contractor.
The Contractor shall supply and install anchors, fasteners, embedded steel work, piping,
conduits and sleeves associated with and required for the equipment being provided and
installed under this Contract, except as otherwise provided in the specifications.
The Contractor shall show the location and full details of foundations, openings, block-outs
and all embedded components on his drawings and shall be responsible for the
completeness and accuracy of his drawings and the information which are to be supplied to
others, Anchorage to be embedded in primary concrete shall be installed by the other
Contractor according to his drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy
of location of all embedded components.
All adjustment to foundation levels, embedment, bedding and grouting of the plant on
foundations and cementing into walls and floors will be carried out by the other Contractors,
but all levelling and adjusting of the plant on foundations shall be carried out by the
Contractor.
The grouting shall be carried out under the supervision of the Contractor and the mix and
grouting pressure shall be suggested by the Contractor. The Contractor shall satisfy himself
that the grouting has been carried out to his entire satisfaction.
The foundation bolts, embedded steel parts, anchors, braces, posts, supports, shims etc.
and all steel work as may be required for temporary or final support of anchorage of the
plant, except concrete and concrete reinforcing steel, shall be provided and installed by the
Contractor as part of this contract.
Any steelwork which is to be built into the concrete foundations shall not be painted or
coated unless otherwise approved.
19. ORDERS ISSUED TO SUBCONTRACTORS

Three copies of orders for all subcontracted plant and material are to be submitted to the
Engineer for approval at time any such order is placed. No prices are required to be shown
on such orders. This clause shall not apply to subcontracts given to regular suppliers of the
Contractor for stock materials and minor components
20. TESTS
During the construction and after the installation of each item of the work, the Contractor
shall perform the tests in accordance with the requirements of the relevant clauses of
detailed specifications.
The tests and test procedures shall be approved by the Engineer. No part of the Work shall
be considered acceptable until it has successfully complied with these tests to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Test records, data, calculation sheets and photographs, if any, shall be submitted to the
Engineer in three (3) copies within one (1) month after the test had been conducted.
21. SPARE PARTS

The Contractor shall recommend and furnish the necessary spare parts other than the parts
listed in Technical particulars. Any spare parts supplied shall be packed or treated in such a
manner as to be suitably stored in the climate at the Site for a period of not less than two
years, and each part shall be clearly marked with its description and purpose on the outside
of the packing.
Spare parts so provided shall be delivered into such stores as may be nominated by the
Employer and delivery will not be deemed to be complete until the packages have been
opened by the Contractor, their contents checked by a representative of the Employer and
the articles re-protected and repacked by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer,
or assembled into units at the Employer's option.
22. MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL TOOLS

The Contractor shall recommend one set of Maintenance equipment and special tools
sufficient for the proper Maintenance of all the plant provided by the Contractor.
The Maintenance equipment and special tools shall be supplied in lockable cabinet(s) fitted
internally so that the tools may be safely stored in an orderly manner.
The cost of Maintenance equipment and special tools shall be included in the cost for spare
parts and shall be delivered with the plant.
ELECTROMECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENT AND DESCRIPTION .................................................... 95

2. TURBINE ...................................................................................................................... 100
2.1 Pelton runner ........................................................................................................... 100
2.2 Bearings ................................................................................................................... 101
2.3 Nozzle...................................................................................................................... 101
2.4 Deflector .................................................................................................................. 101
2.5 Shaft ........................................................................................................................ 101
2.6 Casing ...................................................................................................................... 101
2.7 Braking .................................................................................................................... 101
2.8 Turbine inlet valve .................................................................................................. 101
2.9 Operating Voltage 380V, 50 Hz Flywheel .............................................................. 102
2.10 Cooling water system .............................................................................................. 102
3. TURBINE GOVERNOR/ELECTRONIC LOAD CONTROLLER ............................. 102
4. GENERATOR ............................................................................................................... 102
4.1 Excitation system .................................................................................................... 103
4.2 Neutral Grounding................................................................................................... 103
5. POWER TRANSFORMER ........................................................................................... 104
5.1 Tank......................................................................................................................... 104
5.2 Core ......................................................................................................................... 104
5.3 Winding ................................................................................................................... 105
5.4 Oil Preservation System .......................................................................................... 105
5.5 Short Circuit Capacity ............................................................................................. 105
5.6 Tap Changer ............................................................................................................ 105
5.7 Insulating Oil ........................................................................................................... 105
5.8 Bushings .................................................................................................................. 105
5.9 Temperature rise ...................................................................................................... 106
5.10 Ratings and Feature for Step-Up Power Transformer ............................................. 106
6. PROTECTION SYSTEMS............................................................................................ 106
6.1 Turbine Protection ................................................................................................... 106
6.2 Generator Protection ............................................................................................... 106
6.3 Main Transformer Protection .................................................................................. 106
6.4 Transmission Line Protection.................................................................................. 106
6.5 11 KV SWITCHGEAR ........................................................................................... 107
7. 11 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER ........................................................................................ 107
7.1 11 kV disconnecting switch .................................................................................... 107
7.2 11 kV current transformer ....................................................................................... 107
7.3 11 kV potential transformer .................................................................................... 108
7.4 11 kV lightning arrester........................................................................................... 108
8. 0.4 KV SWITCHGEAR ................................................................................................ 108
8.1 0.4 kV air circuit breaker without under voltage trip coil ....................................... 108
8.2 0.4 kv current transformer (500/5a) ........................................................................ 109
8.3 0.4 kV current transformer (1000/5a) ..................................................................... 109
8.4 0.4 kV potential transformer ................................................................................... 109
9. ELECTRICAL AUXILIARIES ..................................................................................... 109
9.1 Station Battery ......................................................................................................... 109

9.2 Earthing System ...................................................................................................... 110
9.3 Power and Control Cables ....................................................................................... 110
9.4 Station Service Board .............................................................................................. 110
9.5 Lighting System ...................................................................................................... 110
9.6 Electrical Operated Travelling Crane ...................................................................... 110
9.7 11kV Switchyard Equipment. ................................................................................. 110
10. STATION AUXILIARIES- MECHANICAL ............................................................ 111
10.1 Cooling Water System. ........................................................................................... 111
10.2 Fire Protection System. ........................................................................................... 111
10.3 Air Conditioning & Ventilation System.................................................................. 111
10.4 Dewatering System and Drainage System. ............................................................. 111
CHAPTER 1. ELECTROMECHANCIAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENT AND DESCRIPTION
Pipe line characteristics
The characteristics of the pipelines at the site are as follows:
Site Gross head

Internal diameter of Thickness of
pipe, mm. Penstock Pipe,
mm
Lower Bom Khola as per salient features as per salient features as per salient features
Mini Hydro
Subproject
Service conditions
All the equipment shall be designed and manufactured for satisfactory operation according to
the conditions specified in the general specification.
Applicable standards
Except as expressly provided in the specifications, all structures, equipment, fabrication and
testing there of shall confirm to the latest applicable standards contained in the following list
or other authoritative standards which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards
mentioned below.
IEC - International Electro technical Commission
ANSI - American National Standard Institute
NEC - National Electric Code
ASME -American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ACI - -American Concrete Institute
ASCE - -American Society of Civil Engineers
NEMA -National Electrical Manufacturers Association
BS -British Standards
IEEE -Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
All threaded parts shall confirm to the standards of the International Organization for
standardization (ISO). In all documents, such as correspondence, technical schedule and
drawings, metric units of measurements shall be employed. On drawings or printed
pamphlets where other units have been used, the metric equivalent shall be marked in
addition.
At all places throughout these specifications, although only one standard is given, any
equivalent applicable standard provided by the Contractor shall be considered as if the
original standard was written thereat. The Contractor shall furnish, however, a Photostat copy
of applicable equivalent standards applied other than those specified.
Units of measurements
Units of measurement shall be in the metric system and Celsius for temperature. However,
where equipment is produced in a country for which the metric and Celsius system are not the
standard systems used said other standard systems may be utilized provided that the metric or
Celsius equivalent is provided in brackets for each such measurement.
Station service
The service power for use within the power plants shall be supplied with 3-phase 4-wire
415/240V AC. The terminal voltage of the auxiliary equipment shall be 400V and 230V
respectively. All electrical equipment and apparatus, which will receive power from a station
service circuit, shall withstand voltage and frequency fluctuation of +/-10% and +/–5% in the
same direction simultaneously.
Terminal blocks and wiring
1) Wiring of the control cabinets, Control boards, cubicle and control boxes for auxiliary
equipment shall consist of 600V grade polyvinyl chloride insulated which shall be
copper stranded wire with the minimum cross section of 1.25 mm2 or more.
2) Wiring shall be gathered to one place to facilitate the connection with
outgoing cables, connections of which shall be made in terminal blocks.
3) Both ends of low voltage wires shall be provided with the terminal number
rings and the number shall be recorded on the wiring diagram.
4) Internal wiring shall be concentrated to the terminal block with a cover and the
terminal numbers installed at the lower part of the equipment or control
cabinets in order to be connected easily to external wires.
5) Terminal blocks shall of the 600V molded block type with an insulating
barrier between terminals.
6) Each terminal block shall have marking strips, and shall be equipped with the
crimp-style terminals (AMP terminal) for 2.0mm2 or more to make connection
with outgoing cables. The terminal blocks shall be provided with ten (10%)
percent additional terminals as spares for each control board and cabinet
besides the necessary numbers. More than two (2) connection wires leading
from outside shall not be connected to one (1) terminal.
Color coding
1) The following color identification shall be applied to the insulation of wires
used for back wiring of cubicles, control boxes and auxiliary equipment.
Earth Green
All other circuits Yellow
2) The terminal of motors or other equipment shall have pressure compression
tube terminal lugs where outgoing cables are to be connected.
Four (4) leads for three (3) phase outgoing cables shall be color coded as
Follows:
Phase 1 Red
Phase 2 Yellow
Phase 3 Blue
Phase 4 Black
DC supply shall be color coded with red for positive leads and blue for negative leads.
Nameplate and marking
Nameplates, instruction plates, wiring signs and any marking whatsoever on the equipment,
shall be in English language. These shall also be made acryl resin.
Painting
1) Synthetic resin paint recommended by the Contractor shall be used for the
finish paint of the exposed portion of all equipment, except for the portion
embedded in the concrete and the mechanical finished surface thereof. The
primary coat shall be of the kind matching finish paint mentioned above and
shall have a rust preventive effect.
2) The exposed portion of all the equipment except portion embedded in concrete
and the mechanical finish surface thereof shall be shop-coated with primary
and finish paint. The Contractor shall provide touch-up paint for the
equipment after the equipment has been installed at the site. The Contractor
together with the equipment plus 15% extra for future repair work shall
furnish paint needed for the finishing coat.
3) Cubicles and control boxes for auxiliary equipment, motors, pumps, tanks and
other shop finished manufacturer's standard products shall be shop-finished
with spray painting and shall not undergo painting at the site. However the
Contractor shall furnish paint for repair use, in a quantity at least 15% of the
paint used for the finishing coat.
4) Cubicles and control boxes shall be coated with non-glossy paint.
5) The color schedule for the equipment shall be decided afterwards of the
Contract.
Piping
1) The Contractor shall furnish all pipes and valves for supply and drainage of
oil, water and pipe supports necessary for installation of pipes, and all anchor
bolts necessary for fixing pipe supports, and also the required packing and
coating for connection in the quantity required. The Contractor shall also
additionally furnish surplus pipes in an amount, which is 5% of the installed
quantity.
2) Pipe for pressure equipment shall be seamless steel tube or seamless copper
tube. A flange shall be fitted to one end of each pipe sector in the
manufacturer's shop and another flange shall be fitted in the other end of the
pipe in the field, if necessary, flanges attached to pressure pipes shall be
welded on both inside and outside. Rim joint for the connection of copper tube
(not more than 20m.) shall be applied at the site, if necessary.
3) Connection of pipes mounted on the equipment shall be supported so as not to
convey the weight of pipes to the equipment. The Contractor shall design the
position of all the pipe fittings to permit dismantling of the pipeline during
maintenance work at minimum time loss.
4) Drawings of pipe connection shall be submitted for approval.
5) The Contractor shall furnish and put drain locks at necessary positions on the
piping system.
6) The section shall also be applied, where applicable, for the penstock section of
trench section of the penstock required under the Tender.
Welding
All welding carried out shall be free from pinholes, cracks and other notable defects.
Materials
Material composing the equipment, unless otherwise provided in the specifications shall be
those selected by thoroughly scrutinizing the properties thereof from among the materials of
good quality usually used for the equipment of the same kind.
The grade and standard number of the materials shall be submitted for approval with the
corresponding approved drawings.
1) Castings
All castings shall be true to pattern of workmanlike finish and of uniform quality and
conditions, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks or other
injurious defects, and shall be satisfactorily cleaned for their intended purpose. The largest
fillets compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a change in section occurs.
The surface of castings, which does not undergo machining, shall be free from foundry
irregularities, such as projections, ridges, hollows, honeycombing etc.
The structures of the casting shall be homogeneous and free from excessive non-metallic
inclusions. An excessive segregation of impurities or alloys at critical points in a casting will
be caused for its rejection.
2) Forging
All forging shall be in accordance with relevant international standards. Alloy
forging shall have physical properties at least equal to those required by the
standards.
The largest fillets compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a
change in section occurs. Tool marks or tearing of the metal by the finishing
tool will not be permitted on the surface of fillets. Grinding or polishing shall
be required to remove such marks if they occur. All finished forging surfaces
shall be smooth and free from tool marks.
3) Steel Plate for Pressure Vessels
Steel plate used for principal stress carrying parts shall meet ASTM standards.
Steel plate used for pressure vessels shall also meet ASTM standards.
4) Stainless steel
Stainless steel shall be in accordance with BS specification or as specified
elsewhere in this specification.
5) Bronze
Bronze for bushing shall be in accordance with BS specification.

6) Babied
Babbitt metal for bearings shall be in accordance with BS specification.
Stresses and factor of safety
Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout the design, especially in the design of all
parts subject to alternating stress or shock.
1) Rotating parts
Maximum principal unit stresses of the rotating parts of the turbines and generators due to
runaway speed shall not exceed ¾ the minimum yield point.
General requirement of the equipment
1) All the equipment shall be new, durable to withstand long time use, and shall
satisfy all requirements, which a complete product should generally meet even
if such are not expressly provided in the specifications.
2) All the equipment shall be of a convenient construction for disassembling,
inspection and erection. All surfaces of water passages shall be of even
smooth finish turbulence.
3) The Contractor shall furnish installation materials as specified in the Technical
Specifications.
4) Conductors shall not be joint by soldering except where absolutely
unavoidable.
5) Inductions motors shall be of the direct line starting, open guarded type, and
when operated, shall not develop trouble under voltage fluctuation of +/-10%.
Neither shall they exhibit any trouble at rise in voltage and frequency of power
source by 30% and 40% respectively, resulting from the full load rejection of
the turbine generator.
6) Magnetic contractors used in various switches shall be made of arc resistant
metal and have sufficient capacity against inrush current and the contact part
shall be free from over-wearing and miscontact for a reasonable period of
service.
7) AC control circuits shall be designed for operation at 100v. Thereby the
Contractor for the relevant control system shall provide 400/110V auxiliary
transformer.
8) The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of anchor bolts and foundation
bolts as necessary for the equipment.
9) The relays (Control relays, Protection relays and auxiliary relays) and meters
shall be suitable for the control system.
10) The cubicles for the Equipment shall be provided with group fault indicator,
unless otherwise provided in the specifications. When any trouble is detected,
the trouble shall be distinguished on this indicator and contacts shall be
provided in the indicator and control on the cubicle.
11) Cubicles shall be provided with a fluorescent light (230V AC, 1ph. 50Hz)
inside for interior lighting, and shall be provided with a door switch and a
moisture-preventing heater (230V AC. 1ph. 50Hz).
12) The bushings, insulators and porcelain housing used in the equipment shall
have sufficient mechanical and electrical strength and shall meet the
requirements of relevant standards.
13) The ground terminal of the equipment shall be provided and be suitable for
hard drawn copper stranded conductor. All grounding works shall be done
with hard drawn copper.
Tests
The Contractor shall execute all shop tests and all field tests required in the specifications in
accordance with the provisions thereof. The Contractor shall submit the test results the
1) Shop tests
The shop test shall be conducted in the presence of a representative of the
Employer, unless otherwise noted in the specifications.
2) Field tests
a) Tests during installation
The Contractor shall perform all tests made at the site in presence of the Engineer's
representative. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the detailed plan for each item of
tests specified in the technical specifications, fourteen (14) days prior to the execution of each
tests.
The Contractor shall also prepare and submit the reports of each test, which are carried out by
the Contractor based on the results within thirty (30) days after completion of each test.
b) Acceptance tests
After completion of adjustments and tests of each Equipment during the installation as
required in the specifications, and upon all the equipment being ready for operation, the
Contractor shall carry out tests of the equipment according to requirements stipulated in the
technical Specifications in the presence of the Engineer's representative.
2. TURBINE
The turbine is of the Horizontal shaft, single runner, Pelton type runner which should have
performed 5 years successfully at or above 2700 msl, Turbine manufacturer should be
Andritz or Voith or EFG Turbinen or equivalent with a rated output of 240 kW at 85%
of nozzle opening and a water discharge of 0.105 m3/s when operating at the rated speed of
1000 rpm under the rated net head of 240.86 m with (mechanical) +10% overhead. The
installed capacity of the powerhouse is set at 200 kW. The period of validity of the
Warranty shall be at least 3 years.
2.1 Pelton runner
The runner shall be made in on piece of cast stainless steel of 13% chromium, 4% nickel
(DIN 17.445 G-X5 CrNi 13.4, ASTM A 743 CA 6 NM), with ultra-low sulfur and nitrogen
content having enough strength to withstand wear and tear, corrosion, cavitation, abrasion
and fatigue. The runner blades shall be uniform and properly shaped. They must withstand
mechanical strength to transmit power on turbine shaft and associated hydraulic and
centrifugal forces and must be able to withstand forces due to runway speed and continuous
light load operation. The finished runners shall be dynamically and statically balanced.
2.2 Bearings
Turbine has two identical type roller bearings to withstand thrust and radial load of different
operating conditions. The lubrication system shall be designed so that the bearing
temperature shall not exceed 650C under continuous operation.
2.3 Nozzle
Nozzles shall be of the straight-flow type. The nozzle assembly shall be removable and the
design shall incorporate lugs or other means for raising and lowering the assemblies.
Adequate adjusting rings shall be provided for each nozzle to ensure correct alignment of the
nozzles.
2.4 Deflector
Automatic electro-magnetic operating deflector shall be provided on nozzle. The nozzle body
shall be adequately reinforced to support the jet deflector. The deflectors and the supports
shall be designed to prevent any harmful vibrations during operation, including complete
load-rejection. The deflector design shall ensure that no deflector can contact the runner in
the event of operating mechanism breakdown.
2.5 Shaft
The turbine shaft shall be made of forged carbon steel, properly heat-treated with integrally
forged skirt for the turbine guide bearing and coupling flanges for connection to the runner
and to the generator shaft. It shall be designed to withstand a critical speed of 130% of the
larger one between the runaway speed and the maximum speed of the turbine. The shaft shall
be free from any harmful vibrations, deflections or deformation under any turbine operating
condition.
2.6 Casing
The casing shall be made of cast steel or welded steel plated. The casing shall be so designed
that the maintenance and removal of turbine runner can be easily made.
2.7 Braking
All automatic pneumatic type braking shall be provided in order to stop the machine so that
undue wear and tear does not take place in the bearing. A manual handle on the brake shall
also be provided. Brake is applied on flywheel disc. All turbine instrumentation such as unit
control boards and main inlet valve control cabinets will be located close to the relevant units
near to the turbine-generator units which are advantageous for local operation, maintenance
and service.
2.8 Turbine inlet valve
One inlet valve with dismantle joint will be provided in turbine-generator unit. The Gate
valve of 300 mm diameter with Electrical operated mechanism is used in system. Nominal
pressure withstanding capacity of turbine main inlet valve is 25 bars. For safety reason and to
reduce the required capacity of the drainage and dewatering system, valve will be equipped
with smaller by-pass valve for filling of the turbine distributor piping.
Nominal Diameter 300 mm
Appropriate temperature <=95°C
Nominal Pressure 25 bars
Valve drive system
Torque 1500N/m (min)
Drive type Electrical motor
2.9 Operating Voltage 380V, 50 Hz Flywheel
An adequate sized flywheel shall be provided for each generating unit to guarantee the
correct operation of the system in isolated operation. The flywheel shall be mounted on the
turbine extension shaft between generator and turbine.
2.10 Cooling water system
Cooling water supply system will provide necessary amount of water for cooling lubricating
oil of turbine bearing. In addition to supply for cooling water, water may have to be provided
for firefighting system. The water for heat exchangers and cooling coils may be taken from
the penstock, the tailrace or a separate source.
3. TURBINE GOVERNOR/ELECTRONIC LOAD CONTROLLER
For economic and reliable operation of plant, turbine will be supplied with Governor. The
period of validity of the Warranty shall be at least 3 years.
4. GENERATOR
One unit of horizontal shaft, three phase Synchronous generator should be installed to
generate 220kW power which should have performed 5 years successfully at or above
2700 msl, Generator manufacturer should be Andritz or Voith or EFG Turbinen or
equivalent. The period of validity of the Warranty shall be at least 3 years.
The generator should be grid synchroniseable. The shaft of the generators will be directly
coupled to the turbine runner. Each generating unit will be provided with Exciter and AVR.
Stator winding shall be made of copper. The insulation of conductors shall conform to "Class
F" insulation. Epoxy varnish shall be applied. The stator winding of the generator shall be
star connected and neutral shall be grounded with neutral grounding reactor to limit the
unbalance fault current. The temperature rise shall be limited to 800 C. The cooling system
and fire protection of the generator will be as suggested by the manufacture. The rotor core
shall be built up of high-grade thin laminated silicon steel. The rotor winding shall be made
of copper and the insulation is “Class F" insulation. Epoxy varnish shall be applied. The rotor
shall be dynamically balanced at the Manufacturer's shop. The generator shaft shall be of
forged steel and shall have ample strength and size enough to bear torsion force and bending
moment at any speed, including full runaway speed of the turbine.
The main parameters of generator will be as follows:
Type Synchronous, 3-phase, horizontal shaft, salient pole revolving field
No. of units 1
Rated output 300 kVA
Rated generation voltage 400V

Rated power factor 0.8 (lagging)
Rated efficiency 92.0 %
Voltage regulation ±5%
Rated frequency 50 Hz
Rated speed 1000 rpm
No. of poles 6
Short circuit ratio 1.2
Stator/ rotor insulation Class F
Stator connection Star with neutral earthed
Excitation Brushless
Line charging capacity Enough for 10km of 3 phase 11kV line of WEASEL
conductor or 50km of 3 phase 400V line of RABBIT conductor
4.1 Excitation system
The excitation system installed for generator excitation will be of brushless type and will
consist of an alternating current exciter (A.C. Exciter), rotatory rectifiers, field circuit
breaker, excitation transformer and voltage regulating equipment. The excitation system shall
have sufficient capacity that the generator is capable of supplying continuous rated load at
rated voltage, power factor and frequency. Provision shall be made for both automatic and
manual control of exciter voltage. The A.C. Exciter shall be directly coupled to the generator
shaft. The A.C. Exciter shall be three phase rotating armature type generator and shall be self-
ventilating air cooled type. Sufficient numbers of rotating diodes; rectifier shall be installed in
the rotor so that excitation current for generator shall be supplied through the main shaft
insulated conductor strip.
The voltage regulating equipment will consist of an automatic voltage regulator (AVR)
equipped with reactive power limiter, reactive power control equipment, thyristors and other
accessories. The AVR shall be of high speed, quick response type. The general requirements
for AVR shall be as follows:
- The voltage control under steady state condition shall be  5 % of rated terminal
voltage.
- Over voltage resulted due to sudden load rejection at any load shall not exceed above 30 %
of the voltage held before the occasion of sudden load rejection.
- The AVR shall suppress the residual voltage through field discharge switch.
4.2 Neutral Grounding
Reactor neutral grounding is preferred for this MHP schemes. It is a preferred method of
grounding in cases where a neutral current-limiting device is required to meet ANSI/IEEE
short-circuits requirements and where the ratio of the zero sequence reactance to the positive
sequence sub-transient reactance at the fault does not exceed 6.0. Reactor neutral grounding
limits transient over-voltages and over-voltages to ground on the un-faulted phases to safe
values where the above reactance ratio does not exceed approximately 6.0.However, in most
hydro applications, this reactance ratio approaches or exceeds 6.0, and since the high
impedance distribution transformer-secondary resistor system is more economical.
5. POWER TRANSFORMER
Standards and Quality Certification

The equipment specified in this Section of the Contract shall conform to the latest edition of
the appropriate IEC specifications and/or other recognized international standards. In
particular:
IEC 76 Power transformers
IEC 137 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV
IEC 156 Method of determination of electric strength of insulating oils
IEC 296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear
IEC 551 Measurement of transformer and reactor sound levels
IEC 616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformer
IEC 722 Guide to lightning and switching impulse testing of power transformers
IEC 733 Determination of water in insulating oils
IEC 5493 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion
5.1 Tank
Each transformer shall be provided with a case of rigid construction, which shall be oil tight
and gas tight. The thickness of all tank sides except the tank bottom and cover shall not less
than 3.2 mm. The thickness of tank, the tank bottom and cover shall not be less than 4.0 mm.
The tank shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage or permanent distortion, a
pressure 25% greater than the maximum operating pressure. The tank cover shall be bolted.
Each transformer shall be provided with earthing terminal with clamp type connector. The
radiator shall be of pressed steel or corrugated type design.
5.2 Core
The transformer shall be of core type. The cores shall be constructed with interleaved grade
non aging, high permeability, grain oriented and cold rolled silicon steel laminations,
properly treated after being sheared to remove any burr and shall be re-annealed to remove
any residual stresses.
All steel sections used for the support of the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted after
cutting, drilling and welding.
All laminations shall be properly insulated with the materials that will not deteriorate due to
pressure and hot oil.
The core shall be rigidly clamped to ensure adequate mechanical strength. Core and coil
assembly shall be capable of withstanding the vibrations and shock during transportation,
installation, service and adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of core and
coil assembly relative to the tank during these conditions.
The core shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting complete core and coil
assembly of transformer.
5.3 Winding
The design, construction and treatment of winding shall give proper consideration to all
service factors. The completed assembly of core and coils shall be dried in a vacuum
sufficient to ensure elimination of air and moisture within the insulating structure. After the
drying process, the assembly shall be immediately impregnated with dry oil. The windings of
the transformer shall be fabricated of copper materials. Aluminum winding materials will not
be accepted.
5.4 Oil Preservation System
The transformer shall be provided with conservator. The conservator vessel shall have a
capacity between highest and the lowest levels of not less than 7.5% of the total cold oil
volume of the transformer.
Each conservator vessel shall be fitted with a breather in which silica gel is the drying agent.
Windows in the silica gel breathers shall be sufficiently large enough to allow crystal color
change to be easily observed. The position of the silica gel breather shall be such that
maintenance can be carried out without the need to de-energize the transformer.
5.5 Short Circuit Capacity
The transformer shall be designed and constructed to withstand without injury the mechanical
and thermal stresses produced by short circuit current limited by the impedance of the
transformer only.
5.6 Tap Changer
An externally operated tap changer for transformers shall be furnished with each
transformer, to be operated only when the transformer is de-energized. The tap changer shall
include an operating handle, visible indication of tap position and means for locking the tap
changer in any desired position. The locking device shall be arranged to prevent locking the
tap changer in an off position. Mechanical means shall be provided for limiting the maximum
and minimum travelling of the extreme tap positions to be at the maximum and minimum
position of the tap changer.
5.7 Insulating Oil
The insulating oil shall be refined mineral oil. Necessary quantity of oil for the transformer
shall be furnished by the contractor.
5.8 Bushings
The bushings shall be made of homogeneous and well vitrified porcelain. The color of the
insulator shall be brown and the surface shall have polished glaze.
The high voltage bushings shall have bolted terminal lugs suitable for terminating 20 100
mm2 stranded ACSR conductor.
The low voltage bushings shall have bolted terminal lugs suitable for terminating aluminum
conductor compatible to the kVA rating of the transformer.
The low voltage neutral bushings shall include a bolted terminal lug for terminating together
an earth wire and an aluminum conductor of neutral circuit of the LV system.
5.9 Temperature rise

Average winding temperature rise above maximum ambient temperature (45◦C) when
carrying maximum continuous rated kVA shall not exceed 55◦C. The temperature rise of the
insulating oil shall not exceed 50◦C when measured near the top of the main tank.
5.10 Ratings and Feature for Step-Up Power Transformer
Number of unit : 1 Type : 3-phase, oil-immersed
Installation : Outdoor Rated capacity; 275 kVA
Rated H.V. (Secondary):11kV Rated L.V. (Primary): 400 V
Efficiency : 98 % Cooling : ONAN
Rated frequency: 50Hz L.V. winding connection: Delta
H.V. winding connection Star Vector group : YNd11
Tap changer Off-load, ±5 % in steps of ± 2.5 % Material of conductor : Copper
6. PROTECTION SYSTEMS
Protection system will be provided to isolate faulty systems as quickly as possible, to limit
damage and to maintain healthy systems in stable operating conditions. The system will
feature a high degree of selectivity and discrimination between faulty and healthy circuits.
The protection system will be provided for turbine, generator, transformer and transmission-
line.
6.1 Turbine Protection
The turbine shall be protected against following conditions:
- Bearing temperature extremely high/low
- Over speed / under speed
- Regulating pond/ reservoir water level below the setting etc.
- Tailrace water level, Drainage water level high etc
6.2 Generator Protection
Generator shall be provided with following protection schemes:
- Field loss protection
- Reverse power protection
- Over voltage and under voltage protection
- Over current protection
- Ground over current protection
- Over frequency and under frequency protection
6.3 Main Transformer Protection
The main transformer shall be provided with following protection schemes:
- Over current and earth fault protection
- Buchholz relay protection
- Lightning protection by Lightning arrester
6.4 Transmission Line Protection
The transmission line and associated equipment at both ends shall be protected with the
following protection schemes:
- Over current protection
- Ground over current protection

- Lightning protection by Lightning arrester
6.5 11 KV SWITCHGEAR
The rating of the equipment will be as follows:
7. 11 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
One number of 11 kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB) shall be installed
The technical details of VCB will be as follows:
Type 3-phase, single throw in operation, Outdoor
Quantity required: 1
Voltage rating:
Nominal system voltage 11 kV
Rated maximum voltage 12 kV
Current rating:
Rated continuous current 630 A
Rated short circuit breaking current 25 kA
One min. power frequency withstand voltage (rms) 27 kV
Impulse withstand voltage (peak) 40 kV
Frequency 50 Hz
7.1 11 kV disconnecting switch
Type 3-pole, Single throw outdoor
Quantity required 2
Voltage rating:
Nominal system voltage 11 KV
Rated maximum voltage 12 KV
Frequency 50 Hz
Insulation level:
Basic impulse level (BIL) 40 KV
Power frequency withstands voltage (1 min.) 27 KV
Current rating:
Rated continuous current at 45oC ambient temp. 630 A
Rated short-time withstand current (r.m.s.) 25 KA
Rated peak withstand current 62.5 KA
Operating Mechanism Manually gang operated
7.2 11 kV current transformer
The technical details of current transformer will be as follows:
Type Outdoor
Voltage rating:
Nominal system voltage 11 KV
Rated maximum voltage 12 KV
Frequency 50 Hz
Short time thermal ratings 10 kA for 1 sec

Current ratio 25/5A
Burden 50 VA
7.3 11 kV potential transformer
The technical details of potential transformer will be as follows:
Type Outdoor
Rated primary voltage 11 KV /√3
Rated secondary voltage 110 V/ √3
Frequency 50 Hz
Burden 200 VA
Power factor 0.8
7.4 11 kV lightning arrester
The Lightning arresters will be provided for protecting the substation equipment including
main transformer against possible lightning strokes and other abnormal voltages.
The technical details of Lightning arrester will be as follows:
Type Outdoor, gapless ZnO arrester
Frequency 50 Hz
System voltage 11 kV
Rated voltage 9 kV
Impulse withstand voltage (BIL) 40 kV
Power frequency withstand voltage 27 kV
Nominal discharge current 10 kA
8. 0.4 kV SWITCHGEAR
0.4 kV switchgear which is provided for the generator circuits, the main transformer primary
circuit and station supply transformer circuit, will be of self-supporting, indoor and metal
enclosed cubicle type.
8.1 0.4 kV air circuit breaker without under voltage trip coil
0.4 kV fixed out type Air Circuit Breaker (ACB) shall be installed. The ACB shall be of three
phases with single throw in operation.
The technical details of ACB will be as follows:
Type 3-phase, single throw in operation,
indoor, fixed type
Voltage rating:
Nominal system voltage 0.4 kV
Rated maximum voltage 0.6 kV
Current rating:
Rated continuous current 1000 A
Rated short circuit breaking current 25 kA
Frequency 50 Hz
8.2 0.4 kv current transformer (500/5a)

Type Indoor
Voltage rating:
Nominal system voltage 0.4 KV
Rated maximum voltage 0.6 KV
Frequency 50 Hz
Class 0.5/5P10
Current ratio 500/5A
Burden 15 VA
8.3 0.4 kV current transformer (1000/5a)

Type Indoor
Voltage rating:
Nominal system voltage 0.4 kV
Rated maximum voltage 0.6 kV
Frequency 50 Hz
Class 0.5/5P10
Current ratio 1000/5A
Burden 15 VA
8.4 0.4 kV potential transformer

The technical details of potential transformer will be as follows:
Type Indoor
Rated primary voltage 0.4 kV /√3
Rated secondary voltage 110 V/ √3
Frequency 50 Hz
Class 0.5
Burden 200 VA
Power factor 0.8
9. ELECTRICAL AUXILIARIES
9.1 Station Battery
2 Nos. 110 Volt, 200 AH Lead Acid Plate batteries high discharge type complete with stands,
insulator, inter cell connector with float and boost charger and D.C distribution board shall be
required for control and protection system, D.C emergency lighting of power house and
tripping and closing coils of 11kV and 0.4kV switchgears, field circuit breaker of generator
etc. The charger will be static type suitable for float and deep charging. The battery shall be
open type single cell construction. The capacity will however be designed taking into
consideration various loads of power house.
9.2 Earthing System

Suitable provision has been made for Earthing all the electrical equipment, powerhouse and
switchyard etc. as per B.I.S Code and I.E rules. A proper Earthing network include ground
met will be designed to provide full protection to equipment and working persons against step
potential and touch potential due to short-circuiting and other faults. The resistance of
earthing network shall be less than 1 Ohm for the switchyard and 0.5 Ohm for the power
house. Necessary shielding of the switchyard may also be provided as per actual requirement.
9.3 Power and Control Cables
Suitable size single core aluminum conductor armored XLPE cable to connect generator to
main transformer. 0.4 kV 2.5/5 sq. mm multi core copper conductor PVC insulation FRLS
armored control cable will be used for CT, PTs, Control metering and protection.
9.4 Station Service Board
The 415 Volts station service board is required for distribution of power at 415/240 Volts. 3
phase, 4 wire 50 c/s to various auxiliary generating units and other station auxiliary of power
house. The scheme of power distribution comprises of installation of one station service
board and one lighting board. The power supply to station service board shall be through
direct generator terminal of 0.4kV, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
9.5 Lighting System
The complete powerhouse, appurtenant works and switchyard shall be adequately illuminated
as per relevant norms. The system shall include lighting factures, distribution boards, lighting
boards, junction boxes, switchboard, cable wire conduits, poles etc. Following illumination
levels are to be observed.
(a) Machine Hall 200 Lux (b) Control Room 300 Lux (c) Switch yard 50 Lux
9.6 Electrical Operated Travelling Crane
For erection and subsequent maintenance of the turbine/generating units as well as for
handling other equipment, EOT crane of suitable capacity shall be required. This crane shall
handle all the equipment inside powerhouse machine hall.
9.7 11kV Switchyard Equipment.
Considering for switchyard layout shall be simplicity in layout, closeness to generating
station, following standard REC layouts, conformity of equipment’s fully in Indian Standards
and as far as possible to REC standards, easy in operation, reliability in power supply and
economy in cost in order to sell power at reasonable rate to consumers. Safety considerations
are of paramount importance and suitable clearances are to be provided. Fencing is to be
provided around the switchyard to make it accessible only to authorized persons. All the
following equipment’s shall be provided in the switch yard with structures and proper
Earthing.
a) 11 kV Air Blast Circuit Breaker b) 11 kV Potential Transformer c). 11 kV Current
Transformer
10. STATION AUXILIARIES- MECHANICAL

10.1 Cooling Water System.
Suitable provision for providing cooling water for the bearing of turbine shall be made. The
water should be free from silt and other suspended particles. If quality of water is not proper,
a separate water storage tank may be provided. The tank is to be filled with tailrace water
through motor pump. A suitable control system is to be developed so that motor is operated
on predetermined water level for filling the tank. Suitable strainers may also be provided for
removing suspended particles. Alternatively, desilting arrangement may be provided in this
tank.
10.2 Fire Protection System.
Portable CO2 fire extinguisher will be put up for general purpose. Portable foam type for oil
fire will be provided. Dry powder type will also be provided for electrical components. The
fire extinguishers of appropriate capacity will be provided. This system of fire protection is
proposed since the power station is small. Elaborate CO2 protection has not been considered
necessary as these generators have open ventilation, the ventilating air being drawn from both
the ends of the generators and is discharge at the top of the machine. Three no of portable
CO2, tow Nos portable foam type, 2 Nos. dry power type each of 9 kg capacity will be
sufficient for the power house. Two sets each containing six buckets filled with clean dry
sand and water will also be kept, one in erection bay and other in switchyard.
10.3 Air Conditioning & Ventilation System
Air conditioning units for control room shall be provided to control desired temperature and
humidity. Exhaust fans shall be provided near roof truss on downstream wall of powerhouse
building and inlet fans above the floor level on upstream wall for ventilation of the area.
Three exhausts and three inlets fan of 450 mm capacity may be sufficient for this purpose.
10.4 Dewatering System and Drainage System.
The draft tube gate is to be provided for dewatering for inspection and maintenance of runner
and underwater parts. Dewatering pump of suitable capacity is proposed. Two such
dewatering pumps will be installed one of them as stand by. However actual size of
dewatering pump will depend upon the actual dimension and volume of draft tube offered by
manufacturer.
Section 6 - Employers Rrequirement Specification (T&D) 6- 2- 112
Transmission and distribution Specification
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL .............................................................................................. 114

1.1 Tubular steel pole ................................................................................................................ 114
1.2 Stay Set ............................................................................................................................... 118
1.3 Stranded stay wire ............................................................................................................... 120
1.4 Galvanized steel bolts, nuts and miscellaneous fastening components .............................. 120
1.5 Preformed wire products ..................................................................................................... 121
1.6 Ground rods and clamps ..................................................................................................... 122
1.7 Grounding Conductor ......................................................................................................... 122
1.8 Cross arms and bracing angles ............................................................................................ 123
1.9 Transformer platforms ........................................................................................................ 124
1.10 Pole clamps ......................................................................................................................... 125
1.11 Porcelain insulators ............................................................................................................. 125
1.12 Shackle insulator fittings..................................................................................................... 127
1.13 Pin insulator ........................................................................................................................ 128
1.14 Disc insulator ...................................................................................................................... 128
1.15 Stay insulator ...................................................................................................................... 129
1.16 Acsr conductor .................................................................................................................... 130
1.17 Lightening arrestor set ........................................................................................................ 131
1.18 Disconnect switch ............................................................................................................... 132
CHAPTER 2. CONSTRUCTION STANDARD FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS133
2.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 133
2.2 Route of Circuits ................................................................................................................. 133
2.3 Surveys and Staking ............................................................................................................ 133
2.4 Technical Documentation ................................................................................................... 134
2.5 Material Storage .................................................................................................................. 135
2.6 Poles and Cross Arms ......................................................................................................... 135
2.7 Excavation........................................................................................................................... 136
2.8 Pole Setting ......................................................................................................................... 136
2.9 Stays .................................................................................................................................... 137
2.10 Conductor............................................................................................................................ 138
2.11 Safety .................................................................................................................................. 143
2.12 Demolition .......................................................................................................................... 144
2.13 Clean-up .............................................................................................................................. 144
2.14 Tree Cutting and Trimming ................................................................................................ 145
2.15 Interruptions to Existing Service......................................................................................... 145
CHAPTER 3. TECHNICAL DATA SHEET ............................................................... 146
3.1 ACSR Conductor ................................................................................................................ 147
3.2 Steel Tubular Pole ............................................................................................................... 148
3.3 Porcelain Insulators ............................................................................................................. 149
3.4 Disc Insulators .................................................................................................................... 150
3.5 Stay Insulator ...................................................................................................................... 151
3.6 Insulator Pins ...................................................................................................................... 152
3.7 Disc Insulator Fittings ......................................................................................................... 153

3.8 Cross Arms and Bracing Angles ......................................................................................... 154
3.9 Flat Cross Arm Brace.......................................................................................................... 155
3.10 Pole Clamps ........................................................................................................................ 156
3.11 Galvanized Steel Nuts and Bolts......................................................................................... 157
3.12 Ground (Earth) Rods and Clamps ....................................................................................... 158
3.13 Grounding Conductor ......................................................................................................... 159
3.14 Stay Rod .............................................................................................................................. 160
3.15 Stranded Stay Wire ............................................................................................................. 161
3.16 Disconnect Switch .............................................................................................................. 162
CHAPTER 4. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ........................ 163
4.1 Inspection and Test ............................................................................................................. 163
4.2 Construction Works ............................................................................................................ 163
4.3 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................................... 164
4.4 Quality Assurance Documents ............................................................................................ 164
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION LINE

WORKS
The purpose of the Technical Specifications (TS) is to define the technical characteristics of the Goods
and Related Services required by the Contractor. The TS, as a part of the schedule of Requirements (SR),
constitute a Contract document and are, therefore, a part of the Contract.
The Bidder shall furnish a clause-by-clause commentary on specification, specifying compliance and
deviations, if any. This must be furnished; otherwise, the Bid may be rejected.
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL
Evacuation of power is proposed by medium voltage line connected to various load centers. The two
generating units are synchronized and connected to a single bus, which is then connected to an outdoor
type single step up transformer to transform the whole generated power from 230/400 volts to medium
voltage. (11 KV)
Looking at past installations, there appeared no uniform standard as to what should be the distribution /
medium voltage levels. There are cases of 11KV lines followed some implementing agencies, so the
transmission and distribution line are designed accordingly.
The scope of works for transmission/distribution line and consumer connection under the feasibility
survey includes reconnaissance route survey and based on this designing the system, specifying major
components, estimating bills of quantities and costs. The detail survey and designing could be packaged
into supply, delivery, construction and testing/commissioning of Transmission and Distribution Line
component.
Layout of Transmission and distribution line is provided in drawing.
1.1 Tubular steel pole
1.1.1 Scope
This Specification covers the design, fabrication, testing and supply of tubular steel poles commonly used
in overhead power lines.
1.1.2 General
The steel pole shall be fabricated in several lengths and strengths as specified in Table 1 contained herein.
The steel tubular poles must be manufactured by a company approved to quality standard
ISO 9001:2000. The ISO 9001 certification number, the name of the authorized approving authority with
the contact address and telephone and fax numbers shall also be stated. The Bidder shall enclose a copy of
the ISO 9001 certificate with the bid.
1.1.3 Description
1. The steel poles shall be of swagged design and shall consist of three (3) separate lengths of steel tubing
swagged at two joints to fabricate the poles. However, there are some numbers of poles as mentioned in
the price and delivery schedule which shall be of folding type. The quantities of such folding poles shall
be intimated at the time of contract.
2. The steel tubing used in pole fabrication shall be of steel of any approved process possessing a
minimum tensile strength of 42 Kg/sq. mm and a chemical composition of not more than 0.06% sulphur
and not more than 0.06% phosphorous.
3. The tubing diameter and tubing wall thickness shown in Table 1 for each length of pole are the
minimum size to be used in fabricating each length of pole. It shall be the responsibility of the BIDDER
to determine the adequacy of the component tubing shown for the load to be sustained. However, in no
case the tubing diameter and wall thickness for any component tube be less than the value shown in Table
1.
4. Tubular poles shall be made of welded tubes, swagged and joined together. The upper edge of each
joint shall be chamfered at an angle of about 45-degree. The steel poles shall be composed of three
sections of diminishing diameters and minimum diameter thickness and lengths of pole shall be as shown
in Table 1.
5. All tubes forming parts of the above supports shall be made from hot insulated seamless or
continuously welded steel in accordance with BS 6323 or equivalent applicable Standards.
6. The bottom section of the poles shall be galvanized with minimum coating of weight not less than 460-
gm/-sq. m internally and externally. The length of the bottom section including the base plate to be
galvanized shall be as follows:
11 m pole 5.6 m 10 m pole 5.2 m 9 m pole 5m 8 m pole 4.5 m
The remaining portion of the pole shall be painted with one coat of red oxide primer as specified in IS
2074-1997.
7. Each pole shall be provided with a steel top plate 3-mm minimum thickness welded to the end of the
section. The top plate shall not project beyond the perimeter of the top section. Each pole shall also be
provided with a welded base plate welded to the bottom of the pole.
8. The pole shall, be drilled in accordance with the drilling patterns as defined in the Figure. All the holes
shall be of 18 mm dia. However, the manufacturer must get approval of the drilling pattern before
manufacturing the poles. Each pole shall be marked with the appropriate length as shown in Figure.
9. The folding type of poles shall be fabricated in such a way that the section pieces can be carried to the
site and fitted on the site itself. The pole section on top shall have a flange and the section under it shall
overlap to a length of 25 cm as shown in the diagram. The poles shall be drilled in such a way that the
section in top could be securely fixed the section under it by two bolts of 5/8" x 7" at 90 degree each
other. Two such joints form a complete pole of three sections as shown in Fig 2 and 3.
10. Each pole shall be marked with the appropriate length a shown in table 1.the length of designation
followed by the appropriate drilling pattern letter, shall be black stencil painted with numerical and letters
approximately five(5) centimeters in height e.g-11-c the marking shall be located on the surface f the
pole at distance of 1.5 meters above the deign ground line. The size of the base plate shall be as per
governing standard.
1.1.4 Tolerance
The following tolerances shall be maintained:
a) Tolerance of diameter: +/-1%
b) Tolerance on weight: +/-7.5% on each pole.
+/-5% on a bulk load.
c) Tolerance on thickness: +/10% on each sheet.
e) Straightness: The finished poles shall not be out of straightness by more
than 1/600 of the height.
1.1.5 Tests
The following test (s) shall be performed for the pole furnished. All testing shall be fully documented and
certified test reports shall be provided Project Office.
(a.) Tensile test and chemical analysis for sulphur and phosphorous (b.) Deflection test (c.) Permanent set
test (d.) Drop test
Number of poles selected for conducting tensile test and chemical analysis for sulphur and phosphorous
shall be as given below:
Lot Size No. of poles
Up to 500 1
501 to 1000 2
1001 to 2000 3
2001 to 3000 4
3001 and above 5
Number of poles selected or conducting deflection test, permanent set test and drop test shall be as given
below:
Lot Size No. of poles
Up to 500 5
501 to 1000 8
1001 to 2000 13
2001 to 3000 18
3001 and above 20
The deflection test, permanent set test and drop test shall be conducted in succession on each of the poles
selected.
1.1.6 Deflection Test
Each pole shall be rigidly supported for a distance from the butt end equal to the depth which it is to be
planted in the ground. It shall then be loaded as cantilever and the appropriate deflection load of Table
applied at right angles of the axis of pole 30 cm from the top of the poles up to 9 m ( overall ) and 60 cm
from the top for poles over 9 m ( overall). For convenience in testing, the pole may be fixed horizontally
and the load applied vertically. The temporary deflection due to the applied load at the point of
application of load shall not exceed 157.5 mm.
1.1.7 Permanent Set Test
This test shall be carried out immediately after the deflection test. After application of proper load
specified in Table 1 the permanent set measured from the zero position after the release of the appropriate
applied load at the point of application of the load shall not exceed 13 mm.
1.1.8 Drop Test
The test shall be made in the case of swagged poles. The pole shall be dropped vertically with the butt end
(bottom end) downwards, three times in succession from a height of 2 m on to a hardwood block 150 mm
thick laid on concrete foundation. The pole shall not show any signs of telescoping or loosening of joints.
Should of any of the poles selected fail to pass any of the tests specified above two further poles shall be
selected for testing from the same lot in respect of each failure. Should both these additional poles fail, the
test material represented by the test samples shall be deemed as not complying with these specifications.
1.1.9 Quality Assurance Program
Along with the Bid the Bidder shall furnish quality assurance program of the manufacturer which
includes the Quality System and the Quality Plans, which shall include, among others, information to
meet the following requirement, failing which the Bid shall be liable for rejection.
i. The structure of the organization;
ii. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of works;
iii. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials;
iv. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship;
v. The quality assurance arrangement shall conform to relevant requirements of ISO9001:2000;
vi. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of manufacturer for the raw materials, list
of standards according to which the raw materials are tested, list of test normally carried out on raw
materials;
vii. List of manufacturing facilities available with supporting documents;
viii. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out for
quality control and details of such tests and inspections;
ix. List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer for final testing of equipment specified
and the test plant limitation, if any, vis-à-vis the type, special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the
relevant standards.
1.1.10 Bid Documentations
1. The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing standards for selections of
steel tubings, and any standard followed in the fabrication and testing of the poles offered.
2. The Bidder shall provide a description and certified dimensional drawings of each type of pole
otherwise the bid offer shall be rejected.
3. Two (2) clear certified copies of all type tests performed on similar type of poles and similar working
loads otherwise the bid offer shall be rejected. The type test must have been carried out in recognized
national or international testing laboratory or independent testing laboratory other than manufacturer.
4. A clause-by-clause commentary of specification, specifying compliance and deviations, if any.
5. All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately from the Bid
documents.
Poles specifications
IS Designation 410SP- 52 410 SP-43 410 SP-31 410 SP-13
Overall Length 11 m 10 m 9m 8m
Planting depth(m) 1.8 1.8 1.5 1.5
Sections:
Length, m
Top (h1) 2.7 2.4 2 1.75

Middle (h2) 2.7 2.4 2 1.75
Bottom (h3) 5.6 5.2 5 4.50
Outside Diameter, mm
Top (h1) 114.3 114.3 114.3 88.9
Middle (h2) 139.7 139.7 139.7 114.3
Bottom (h3) 165.1 165.1 165.1 139.7
Thickness, mm
Top (h1) 3.65 3.65 3.65 3.25
Middle (h2) 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.65
Bottom (h3) 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
Approximate weight, Kg 175 160 147 101
Crippling load, kgf 307 348 367 301
Application of load from
top of pole, m 0.6 0.6 0.3
Load for Permanent 190Kgf
Set test
Load for Temporary 83Kgf
Deflection test
Breaking load 390Kgf
1.1.11 marking
a) Name or trademark of manufacturer.
b) Year of manufacture.
c) Name of the Purchaser as follows: "Bom Khola Mini Hydro Project, Lukla"
1.2 Stay Set
1.2.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of adjustable threaded, galvanized steel stay sets for
use in overhead line construction.
1.2.2 Material
1. The stay set shall consist of mild steel, galvanized stay rod, stay tightened (turn buckle) or adjustable
head, eyebolt for pre-stressed concrete pole thimbles complete with stay plate as shown in the conceptual
drawings.
2. The manufacturer of the Stay Set must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2008 with design and
manufacturing quality certification.
3. The stay rod and stay tightened shall be made of mild steel of minimum ultimate tensile strength of
4200-kg/sq. cm.
4. The stay plate shall be square type mild steel plate.

5. The thimbles shall be made of 1.219mm (18 SWG) GI sheet.
1.2.3 Description
1. The stay set shall conform to the conceptual drawings of stay set and its associate hardware given in
drawing and shall have the technical features and dimensions included in Table 1.
2. The stay rod is either thimble-eye type or twin-eye type. The stay rod and suitable nut shall be
fabricated to the shape and dimensions shown in drawing. The thimble-eye or twin-eye of the stay rod
shall be made by drop-forged processing. The thread form at the threaded end of the rod, and that of the
accompanying nut, shall be optional with the supplier. However, it shall be the responsibility of the
Supplier to supply the stay rod with a thread form that shall sustain the rated loads specified in Table 1
without creep or stripping over the full life of the rod material at specified diameter.
3. The stay tightened shall be fabricated in accordance with the conceptual drawing.
4. The eyebolt shall be oval-eye type. The eyebolt shall be made by drop-forged processing. The eyebolt
shall be supplied with suitable nut and washer.
5. The Stay plate shall be square and the plate shall have a matching hole at the center to fit the end of the
stay rod.
6. The thimble shall be suitable for terminating steel stay wire with a preformed grip.
7. After galvanizing, the nut and rod threading shall be such that the nut may be run the full length of the
thread without the use of tools.
1.2.4 Galvanizing
All ferrous parts of the stay set shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
IS: 2629-1985 or the latest version thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at
least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
1.2.5 Bid documentation
The Bidder shall furnish with the Bid a complete description of the stay sets proposed to be supplied
including, but not limited to, steel classification of base metal, detailed drawings showing shape,
dimensions, and threading certified type test results the identity of the proposed manufacturer, and
manufacturers catalogue number, plus catalogue cuts. The technical data furnished shall be bound
separately from the Bid Document.
RATINGS AND FEATURES
Length of stay rod, m. 1.8
Diameter of stay rod, mm. 16
Ultimate tensile strength of stay rod and tightner (min.), kg/sq. mm 4200
Minimum breaking load, kg. 6433
Length of threaded portion, mm. 300
Thimble shape Suitable for preformed for 7/12 SWG stay wire
Thimble section Min.), SWG 18
Stay plate section, mm. 300x300x6
Eyebolt length, mm./1 300

Galvanization IS:2629 1985
Stay plate section 300*300*6 mm
1.3 Stranded stay wire
1.3.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized stranded steel wire for use in overhead
power line as stay wire ropes for line supports.
1.3.2 Description
1. The steel strand shall be fabricated in accordance with B.S. 183 1972/ (1983) or any revision thereof or
other equivalent national or international standard provided that the resulting steel stock is of equal
quality and strength. The minimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2. The wires shall be
45-ton quality.
2. The steel wire strand shall have a left-hand lay. The steel wires shall have no joint throughout the
whole length. Strands shall be uniform and shall have no defects such as cracks, dust encapsulation or
crevices. Further details are given in Table 1 herein.
3. The manufacturer of the Stranded Stay Wire must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2008 with
design and manufacturing quality certification.
1.3.3 Galvanizing
The stranded stay wire shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any
revision thereof or any other national or international standards that ensure at least equal or better quality
to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
RATING AND FEATURES
Steel Wire Size (No. of wire/SWG) 7/12
Grade 700
Steel quality 45 ton
Diameter of Wires, mm. 2.64
Minimum Weight, kg/km 300
Applicable Standard B.S. 183 1972/(1983)
Galvanization IS: 2629-1985
1.4 Galvanized steel bolts, nuts and miscellaneous fastening components
1.4.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel bolts and nuts, as specified
herein, for use in overhead electric line construction.
1.4.2 Material
The bolts and nuts shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 1363 (Part I)-1984 or the latest
version thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least equal or better quality
to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
1.4.3 General
1. Bolts and nuts shall be furnished in the types, diameters and lengths specified in the Price Schedule.
However, the dimensions and length of threading of bolt must be confirmed with the Project prior to
manufacture.
2. Thread forms shall be consistent with all material/items listed herein and shall not strip or slip under
sustained tensile loading equal to the design tensile strength of the threaded material item.
3. The manufacturer must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2008 with design and manufacturing
quality certification.
1.4.4 Machine Bolt and Nut
Each machine bolt shall be furnished with two (2) hexagonal nuts and two (2) plain washers assembled
thereon.
1.4.5 Double-Arming Bolt and Nut
Each double-arming bolt shall be furnished with four (4) hexagonal nuts and two (2) washers assembled
thereon.
1.4.6 Galvanizing
revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal
or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
1.5 Preformed wire products
1.5.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of pin insulator ties and wire strand grips for stay set
commonly used in overhead power line construction.
1.5.2 Description
1. The design of the preformed wire products specified herein shall be appropriate for the optimum
combination of conductor strand diameter, inside diameter, rod diameter, pitch diameter, number of pitch
lengths, direction of lay, and raw materials of the specific application.
2. The manufacturer of the Preformed Wire Products must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2008 with
design and manufacturing quality certification.
3. The preformed wire product shall be so designed to grip the designated surface evenly, with evenly-
spaced gaps, and shall not bridge the gripped surface due to excessive Number of strands in the grip or
tie.
1.5.3 Steel Wire Strand Grip for Stay Set
1. The steel wire strand grip shall be designed for use with thimble eye or double eye stay rod and tightner
fabricated in accordance SPECIFICATION: SP 1.1, stay wire fabricated in accordance with
SPECIFICATION: SP 1.2 (B.S. 183 1972/(1983)) and stay insulator fabricated in accordance with
IS:5300-1969.
2. The steel wire strand grip shall be furnished for strand size and grade in accordance with Table 1.
3. The steel wire strand grip shall be manufactured of a galvanized steel wire in cabled loop form with
long and short legs. The grip shall have a left-hand lay. Galvanizing shall be equivalent to Class C zinc
coating per ASTM A-475.
4. The steel wire strand grip shall be color-coded for strand size and length and shall have one (1) or two
(2) crossover marks for different diameter fittings. An identification tag shall be attached showing the
manufacturer's catalogue number and applicable strand size.
STEEL WIRE STRANDED GRIPS
Tie Application for Strand Size Identification Tag and Color Code
7/8 SWG GS-1 Red
7/12 SWG GS-2 Blue
1.6 Ground rods and clamps
1.6.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel ground rods and clamps for use in
overhead power line construction.
1.6.2 Description
1.6.3 Ground Rod
1. The ground rod shall be made of high carbon, open-hearth steel so as to achieve maximum strength. It
shall be hot dip galvanized.
2. The ground rod shall be 19mm in diameter and 8 feet mm in overall length.
3. The driven end of the ground rod shall have a truncated cone point. The cone point shall be
approximately 13mm long, measured along the axis of the ground rod. The driving head of the ground rod
shall have an approximate 3 mm, 45 degrees chamfer.
4. The manufacturing process shall assure that ground rod does not bend when driven into hard soils.
1.6.4 Ground Rod Clamp
5The ground rod clamp shall be heavy duty forged steel clamp provided with a hex head cup point set
screw of high strength steel with machine-cut threads. It shall be so manufactured that it gives low
resistance connection. The ground rod clamp shall be galvanized.
The clamp shall suitably accommodate and clamp a 19 mm. ground rod and a stranded grounding
conductor of 7/12 SWG size (SPECIFICATION: SP 1.6).
1.6.5 Galvanizing
The galvanization of ground rod and clamp shall be in accordance with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision
thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better
quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
1.7 Grounding Conductor
1.7.1 Scope
This specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized stranded steel grounding conductor for
use in the neutral grounding of distribution transformers and body grounding of electrical equipment.
1.7.2 Description
1. The conductor shall be 7-wire stranded conductor and shall conform to the characteristics as specified
in Table 1 contained herein. Stranded conductor shall be galvanized.
2. The manufacturer of ground Conductor must have been accredited with ISO 9001:2000 with design
and manufacturing quality certification.
1.7.3 Galvanizing
revision thereof or any other national or international standards that ensure at least equal or better quality
to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
Number of strand 7-N0. 12 SWG
Diameter of single strand 2.67 mm
Weight 299 kg/km
Short time fusing current 12 kA
Resistivity 15 Micro-Ohm-cm
1.8 Cross arms and bracing angles
1.8.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel cross-arms and bracing members
commonly used in overhead power line construction.
1.8.2 Material
1. The steel cross-arms shall be fabricated from hot-rolled channels and angles.
2. The steel channels and angles shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with Indian Standards IS:
226-1975 and IS-808-1964 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard
provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be
acceptable. The minimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
1.8.3 Description
1. The steel cross-arms and bracing angles shall be of sizes shown in the Table 1: Cross arms and bracing
angles, contained herein.
2. Conceptual hole pattern and size of holes on cross-arm channels are shown in appropriate drawings
herein, however, the Supplier must confirm with the Project the locations and sizes of holes prior to the
manufacture.
3.The surface of the steel shall be flat after drilling or (punching) and free of dimpling or imperfections.
The hole edges shall be broken by reaming. The holes shall be full dimension after galvanizing and no
minus tolerance of specified hole size will be accepted.
4. The steel cross-arm and bracing angles shall be furnished reasonably smooth on all Surfaces and free of
burrs or sharp projections.
1.8.4 Galvanizing
The steel cross-arms and bracing angles shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS: 2629-
1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that ensure at
least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable..
STEEL CROSSARM CHANNELS AND ANGLE BRACES
S.NO Description Type Dimension in mm.
1 Triangular configuration
11,kV Single Pole Channel 100x50x6.4x5x300
1.1 Pole Top Channel 100x50x6.4x5x1200
1.2 Standard 100x50x6.4x5x1800
2 H - Pole Structure 11 kV: Channel 100x50x6.4x5x2800

2.1 Standard
Angle 100x50x6.4x5x3000
2.2 Bracing Member
Angle 40x40x5x2400
2.3 Bracing Member
40x40x5x1935
3 Lightening Arrester and Channel 100x50x6.4x5x2800

Cutout Support (at
transformer
Platform)
1.9 Transformer platforms

1.9.1 Scope
This specification covers the fabrication and supply of transformer platforms used in overhead power line
construction.
1.9.2 Material
1. The transformer platform shall be fabricated from hot rolled channels, angles and steel members.
2. The steel channels and angles for transformer platform shall be fabricated in accordance with Indian
Standards IS: 226-1975 and IS-808-1964 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or
international standard provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above
will also be acceptable. The minimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
1.9.3 Description
1. The platform shall be fabricated out of galvanized steel members, field assembled by bolting.
2. The platform will support the transformer above the ground and will be supported by two-pole
structures of tubular steel poles or pre-stressed concrete (PSC) poles. Transformers will be bolted to the
platform at four (4) points. Provision should be made for the mounting of transformers of different
physical dimensions and ratings up to 500 kVA.
3. The platform shall be designed by the supplier and fabricated, in general, in accordance with the
conceptual configuration shown in drawing. The design shall provide support for a transformer of a
minimum of 1500 kg in weight with a minimum safety factor of 2.0. The Platform shall be stiff and shall
be capable of withstanding horizontal forces and an overturning moment due to seismic effects on a
transformer with centre of gravity 0.5 meter above its base and seismic horizontal acceleration of 0.4g.
The platform shall be stiff and shall not visibly deflect under static loading.
4. The platform shall be supplied disassembled, complete with all required members and fastenings.
Packing may be made by banding structural members. Fastenings shall be separately packed. Structural
members shall be clearly identified for ease of assembly in accordance with the assembly drawing
furnished by the supplier.
5. The platform shall be suitable for fixing to support tubular poles of 150 to 250 mm diameter in the case
of tubular poles, and to PSC poles of rectangular section with 250 to 350 mm in width and 140 to 180 mm
depth.
1.9.4 Galvanizing
All ferrous parts of transformer platform shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance
with IS: 2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided
that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
1.10 Pole clamps
1.10.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of galvanized steel pole clamps with nuts, bolts and
washers for use on overhead power line construction.
Material
1. The pole clamp shall be fabricated out of hot-rolled steel flat.
2. The steel flat for pole clamp shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with Indian Standards IS: 226-
1975, and IS-1731-1971 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard
provided that ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be
acceptable. The minimum tensile strength of the steel shall be 4200 kg/cm2.
1.10.2 Description
1. Outline details of pole clamps are shown in the drawings. Dimensions may be changed to comply with
the final pole sizes selected. Therefore, the dimensions must be confirmed with the Project prior to
manufacture.
2. Two (2) numbers of galvanized, 16 mm. (dia.) X 60mm. (length), fully threaded bolts with two (2) nuts
and washers shall be provided with each pole clamp.
3. The fittings shall be free of burrs, splinters, splits, sharp points and edges, which may damage
conductors or show evidence of poor workmanship.
4. The surface of the steel shall be flat after drilling or (punching) and free of dimpling or imperfections.
The hole edges shall be broken by reaming. The holes shall be full dimension after galvanizing and no
minus tolerance of specified hole size will be accepted.
5. The pole clamps shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3182 kg at the bolt-hole and bolt slot.
1.10.3 Galvanizing
The pole clamps and nut, bolts and washers shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with IS:
2629-1985 or any revision thereof or other equivalent national or international standard provided that
ensure at least equal or better quality to the standard mentioned above will also be acceptable.
1.11 Porcelain insulators
1.11.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of porcelain insulators, as herein specified, for use on
overhead power line construction.
1.11.2 General
1. All porcelain insulators shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with the Standards referenced or
other national or international standards, for each type of insulator.
2. Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed. The glaze shall
be brown in color. The glaze shall cover all exposed parts of the insulators.
3. The design of insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal.
4. The cement used in construction of insulators shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings
and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible.
5. The insulators should be manufactured in automatic temperature-controlled kilns to obtain uniform
baking and better electrical and mechanical properties.
6. The manufacturer of the Insulator must have been accredited with ISO 9001 (including design in the
scope of registration) quality certification.
1.11.3 shackle insulator
1. The shackle insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 1445-1977 or the latest
version thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least equal or better quality
to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
2. The shackle insulator shall have following ratings and features:
Type-B
- Highest System Voltage 1 kV
- Rated Voltage 500 V
- Power Frequency Withstand Voltage, 1 minute:
Dry 23 kV
Wet 10 kV
- Power Frequency Puncture Withstand
voltage, 1 minute: 1.3 x actual dry flashover voltage
- Leakage Distance (min) 63 mm
- Mechanical Strength 11.5 kN
- IS Type 1
1.11.4 marking
1. Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following:
c) Name of the Purchaser as follows: "………………. Khola Mini Hydropower User’s Committee/ Co-
operative"
d) Minimum failing load in Newtons (for pin and disc insulators only)
Technical Specification
2. Markings on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.

1.11.5 tests
The insulators shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 731-1971
1. TYPE TEST
a. Visual examination,,
b. Verification of dimensions,
c. Visible discharge test,
d. Impulse voltage withstand test,
e. Wet power frequency voltage withstand test
f. Temperature cycle test,
g. Mechanical failing load test
h. 24-hour mechanical strength test for strain insulators
i. Puncture test
j. Porosity test and
k. Galvanizing test
2. ROUTINE TEST
• Visual examination
• Mechanical routine test
• Electrical routine test
1.11.6 Bid documentation
1. The Bidder shall provide with the Bid two (2) clear copies of the governing standards for fabrication
and testing of porcelain insulators and two (2) clear copies of all other relevant standards referenced
therein.
2. The Bidder shall provide certified type test results of all types of porcelain insulators as required by
governing standards and the documentary evidence to show that it has automatic temperature controlled
kilns. Failure of bidder to provide the said documents shall lead to rejection of its bid.
3. The Bidder shall furnish two (2) sets of dimensional drawings of all types of porcelain insulators.
4. The Bidder shall provide complete description, catalogue (in original) dimensional drawings of all
types of insulators.
5. All data, drawings, catalogues and other technical documents shall be bound separately from the Bid
documents.
1.12 Shackle insulator fittings
1.12.1 scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of D-Iron type shackle insulator fittings, and shackle
strap required for shackle insulators for use in overhead low voltage line construction.
1.12.2 general requirements

The shackle fittings shall be free of burrs, splinters, splits, sharp points and edges which may damage
conductors or show evidence of poor workmanship. All ferrous fittings and parts other than stainless steel
shall be galvanized as per IS:2629-1985 or equivalent national or international standard. The minimum
coating thickness shall be not less than 85 micron.
1.12.3 other requirements
• D-Iron type shackle fittings shall consists of the following main components:
-Mild Steel D-Iron,
-No. Mild Steel Bolt and Nut,
-No. Spring Washer.
1.12.4 tests
The shackle fittings shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 7935 or equivalent national or
international standard:
1 Type Tests: (a) Visual Examination (b) Verification of Dimensions (c) Galvanising.
2. Acceptance Tests: (a) Verification of Dimensions (b) Galvanising Tests.
3. Routine Test: Visual Examination Test.
1.13 Pin insulator
The pin insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 731-1971 and IS:3188 or the
latest version thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least equal or better
quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable. The lead thread shall be compatible with
the insulator pin specified in these documents.
The pin insulator shall have following ratings and features:
Highest system voltage 12 kV 36 kV
Rated voltage 11 kV 33 kV
Creepage distance (min) 230 mm 580 mm
Wet power frequency withstand voltage 35 kV 75 kV
Impulse withstand voltage 75 kV 170 kV
Puncture power frequency voltage (min) 105 kV 180 kV
Visible discharge voltage 9 kV 27 kV
(Effective)
Cantilever strength 5 KN 10 KN
G I pin head Small Large
Reference IS Ref.165P IS Ref.L300N
1.14 Disc insulator
The disc insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 731-1971 or latest version
thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least equal or better quality to the
standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
The disc insulator shall be ball and socket fitting type. The disc insulator shall have the following ratings
and features:
Highest system voltage 12 kV
Rated voltage 11 kV
Porcelain diameter (min) 255 mm
Spacing 145 mm
Creepage distance (min) 280 mm
Power frequency puncture Withstand voltage 1.3 x Actual dry flashover voltage
Wet power frequency
Withstand voltage 35 kV
Impulse withstand voltage 75 kV
Puncture power frequency
Voltage (min) 105 kV
Visible discharge voltage 9 kV
Mechanical strength 45 KN
Ball and socket size 16 mm B
Applicable standard for
1.15 Stay insulator
1.15.1 General
The stay insulator shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 5300-1969 or the latest version
thereof or any other national or international standards that ensures at least equal or better quality to the
standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable. The stay insulator shall have following ratings and
features.
Highest system voltage 12 kV 36 kV
Rated voltage 11 kV 33 kV
Creepage distance (min) 41 mm 57 mm
Minimum failing load 44 KN 88 KN
Power frequency withstands voltage, 1 minute
Dry 18 kV 27 kV
Wet 8 kV 13 kV
IS designation A C
1.15.2 Marking
1. Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following:
c) Name of the Purchaser as follows:

d) Minimum failing load in Newton’s (for pin and disc insulators only)
2. Markings on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.
1.15.3 Tests
The insulators shall comply with the following tests as per IS: 731-1971
1.15.4 Type test
(a.) Visual examination. (b.) Verification of dimensions, (c). Visible discharge test (d). Impulse voltage
withstand test (e) Wet power frequency voltage withstand test (f) Temperature cycle test (g) Mechanical
failing load test (h) 24-hour mechanical strength test for strain insulators (i) Puncture test (j) Porosity test
and (k) Galvanizing test
1.15.5 Routine test
(a) Visual examination (b) Mechanical routine test (c) Electrical routine test
1.16 Acsr conductor
1.16.1 Scope
This Specification covers the fabrication and supply of aluminum conductors, steel reinforced (ACSR)
commonly used on overhead power line construction.
1.16.2 Description
1. The manufacturer of the ACSR conductor must have been accredited with ISO 9001 (including design)
2. The ACSR conductor shall be a concentrically stranded right-hand lay conductor.
3. The ACSR conductor shall be fabricated in accordance with BS: 215 (Part 2)-1970, or latest revision
thereof, or any other national or international standards that ensures a substantially equal quality to the
standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
4. The conductor types and its specification shall be as follows
Code Name Nominal Stranding Breaking Mass Resistance
Area Strength At 20o C
(Sq. mm) (Al/Steel) (kN) (kg/km) (Ohm/km)
Rabbit 50 6/1 18.35 214 0.540
1.16.3 Packaging
1. The packaging of goods shall be in accordance with B.S. 1559:1949 Reels and wooden drums for bare
wire, stranded conductors and trolley wire. All conductors shall be furnished on non-returnable treated
seasoned wooden reels. All timber shall be treated to provide protection against rot and insects. Protective
external lagging of sufficient thickness shall be provided and fitted closely on the reels. Binder consisting
of steel straps shall be provided over the external laggings. The reel shall be new and sufficiently sturdy
in construction to withstand ocean shipping, road transport, several loading and unloading, storage in
tropics, hauling and field erection of conductor without distortion or disintegration.
2. Each reel of the conductors furnished shall contain only one (1) length of conductor.
3. All reels shall be legibly marked in paint with the following information:
a) Size of conductor
b) Type of conductor
c) Length in meters
d) Net weight of conductor
e) Direction of rolling
4.The standard length of the completed conductor in each reel shall be as per the table below:
Conductor Size (sq. mm): 30
Normal Length of the Conductor (m): 1000
1.16.4 Tests
The manufactured conductor shall be tested in full compliance with the governing standard including
following routine tests:
(1) Aluminum wire
(a) Tensile test (b) Wrapping test (c) Resistivity test
(2) Steel wire
a) Determination of stress at 1% elongation (b) Tensile test (c) Torsion test or elongation test
as appropriate (d) Wrapping test (e) Galvanization test (f) Ductility test
1.17 Lightening arrestor set
1.17.1 Scope
The specification covers the manufacture testing and supply of distribution type polymer-housed surge
arresters commonly installed on overhead lines.
1.17.2 Description
1. The surge arresters shall be suitable for use on a three phase, way-connected, ungrounded (solid
grounding), 33kV, 11kV, 50Hz distribution circuit at an altitude up to 2000 meters, and ambient
temperature ranging from -5 deg C to 45 deg C.
2. The surge arrester housing shall be of polymer type, manufactured using industry recognized polymeric
material having superior insulation properties necessary for out doo r installations. The housing hall
display in an indelible manner .arrester type voltage rating and year of manufacture.
3. The surge arrestor shall be of gapless metal oxide type
4. The surge arrestor shall have line terminals and ground lead terminals accommodating copper or
aluminum conductor sizes from 13.3 mm sq,(6 SWG) through 53.49mm sq.(1/)AWG) Each arrester shall
be provided with nut and wire clamp as the line terminal and ground terminal accessory hardware.
5. The surge arresters shall be furnished with necessary mounting bracket and accessories necessary for
steel channel (100x50x50x2200) cross-arm mounting.
6. The surge arresters must be manufactured by a company approved to quality standard ISO9001.
7. The surge arresters shall have the following character tics
11kV 33Kv
a. Type Outdoor, Station type
b. Voltage rating (Ur) Vrms 9 30
c. Nominal System Voltage,KVrms 11 33

d. Maximum System Voltage, Kvrms 12 36
e. System frequency,Hz 50 50
f. Nominal discharge current,kA 10 10
8. The surge arresters shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC99-4(latest revision)
1.18 Disconnect switch
1.18.1 Scope
This Specification covers the manufacture, testing and supply of single-pole, pole mounted disconnect
switch suitable for double cross arm mounting commonly used in overhead electric power lines.
1.18.2 Description
1. The manufacturer of Disconnect Switches must have been accredited with IS0 9001 including design
2. The switch assembly shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with IEC: 265-1 (1988), IEC: 529
(1989) and IEC: 60-1 (1989), latest revision thereof or any other national or international standards that
ensures at least a substantially equal quality to the standard mentioned above, will also be acceptable.
3. The switch base shall be rugged and formed steel channel with holes and slots to adapt the switch to
various mounting configurations. The switch shall be furnished with straps and hardware for steel cross
arm mounting.
4. The switch shall have a silver-plated copper switch-blade. The switchblade shall incorporate a positive
locking latch and a large pulling eye and pry-out mechanism.
5. The switch shall include tin-plated connector clamps that accommodate conductors from 25 sq. mm. to
100 sq. mm.
The electrical characteristics of the switch shall be as follows:
11kV 33kV
Rated maximum voltage 12 kV 36 kV
Nominal voltage 11 kV 33 kV
Rated frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
Rated normal current 400 A 800 A
Momentary current 40 kA 40 kA
Rated short circuit making current 25 kA 25kA
Impulse withstand voltage 95 kV 170
Min. power frequency withstand voltage
Dry 35 kV 90
Wet 30 kV 70
1.18.3 Tests
The switch shall be tested in accordance with the relevant provisions of the governing standard.
CHAPTER 2. CONSTRUCTION STANDARD FOR CONSTRUCTION

WORKS
2.1 General
1. These specifications together with the Construction Standards shall govern the performance of the
Works and shall be the basis for inspection and acceptance of the Works by the Project Officer/ Engineer.
2. These specifications and the Construction Standards shall be considered as mutually inclusive, and the
conditions stated in each shall supplement the other as appropriate.
3. All these specifications shall be followed at all times by the Contractor unless specifically accepted in
writing by the Project Officer/ Engineer, or unless some aspects of the work covered by these
specifications are not required by the scope of work.
2.2 Route of Circuits
1. The line routes shown on line route drawings are provisional and subject to finalization by the
Contractor. To the greatest extent practicable, all overhead circuits should be located along streets or
traveled ways ordained by the Village Development Committee or required authority as public property,
except as required for service drops and circuits to individual consumers.
2. To the greatest extent practicable, all facilities should be located on public property, and in no case
shall private property be occupied unless specifically authorized by the Project Officer/ Engineer.
2.3 Surveys and Staking
1. All structures should be located at the outer limits of public property along streets or travelled ways.
Structures should also be located along streets at property lines of adjacent private property. Structures
and stays running parallel or perpendicular to the line route shall not block portions of streets, travelled
ways, drives, passages, or gates.
2. All structures shall be so located as to reduce, to the greatest extent practicable, obstacles to pedestrian
and vehicular traffic.
3. Where underground facilities are indicated by surface conditions, or where such facilities can be
located, structures and stays shall be so located as to avoid conflict with such facilities during
construction.
4. All structure and stay lead locations shall be staked. At points of intersection (PI) of tangent line
sections, steel rebar stakes shall be used to locate the PI. A minimum of two (2) side sightings will be
made at each PI to permit re-location of PI in the event of stake removal. All structure locations in tangent
line sections shall be staked.
5. All distances between structures, and other necessary measurements of length, shall be measured to
accuracy of 0.1 meter and all angles shall be determined by transit to an accuracy of 0.1 decimal degree.
All elevations shall be measured to an accuracy of 0.1 meter by means acceptable to the Project
Officer/Engineer.
6. All measuring and staking activity shall be accomplished by personnel with experience in survey
procedures; and standard survey equipment acceptable to the Project Officer/Engineer, shall be used to
perform the survey work. Field survey notes covering all survey work shall be produced and maintained
and shall be returned to the Project Officer/Engineer at the time of submission of final PCS report. The
format of proposed survey notes shall be submitted to the Project Officer/Engineer for approval.
7. Survey work shall include centerline and structure location and staking; determination of overhead and
side clearings of other structures, wires, and obstacles; area surveys and plotting; and centerline profiles
of terrain; as directed by the Project Officer/Engineer.
2.4 Technical Documentation
1. All technical documentation as specified herein shall be prepared by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall employ skilled drafting personnel to produce all documentation specified. All technical
documentation prepared by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval of the Project Officer/Engineer
prior to acceptance by the Project Officer/Engineer of such documentation. All technical documentation
shall be prepared in the English language.
2. Documentation shall be prepared using the following mediums:
(a) A4 Size of paper shall be used to produce the base Structure Data Sheet (SDS) and
A1 size of drawing papers for As-Built Drawings and other drawings specified by the Project
Officer/Engineer. The scale for drawing shall be 1:5000.
A1 594 mm x 841 mm (23.39" x 33.11")
A4 210 mm x 297 mm (8.27" x 11.69")
(b) Computerized geographical information system shall be used to produce small area plotting, profiles
of line-sections and centerline plotting necessary for the development of SDS and As-Built Drawings.
(c) A set of digitized data on CD shall be submitted separately.
3. SDS shall be prepared as specified in, Preamble to Price Schedules by the Contractor showing his
proposed construction details for erection of facilities in accordance with the Construction Standards. The
SDS shall be prepared after the centerline survey and staking is completed, for any line section designated
by Project Officer/Engineer, and shall be submitted to Project Officer/Engineer for approval prior to any
construction of the facilities shown in SDS. Submission of SDS for approval shall be in A4 size paper.
Project Officer/Engineer may require any revisions to be made, at their sole discretion, prior to approval
of the SDS for construction. An approved and field checked SDS is required for all Construction Units
invoiced by the Contractor. The Contractor and Project Officer/Engineer representative shall perform
Field checking of the SDS jointly. The SDS and As Built Plan are intended as permanent records for
Project Officer/Engineer. Any construction performed prior to the Contractor’s receipt of approved SDS
from Project Officer/Engineer shall be completely at the Contractor’s risk, and Project Officer/Engineer
shall have the right to require any correction due to the un-approved construction activities.
As-Built Drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor in the general format provided by the Project
Officer/Engineer. Drawing size shall be approximately 841 x 594 mm overall and the scale shall be
1:5000. The Project Officer/Engineer shall provide any available environmental background data for
inclusion on the various drawings and the Contractor shall record (in ink) all facilities As Built.
The Contractor shall prepare other technical drawings, in the same medium and format as the As-Built
Drawings, for example As-Built Drawings index sheets, pole maps, and one line diagrams as specified
and required by the Project Officer/ Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish Transformer Record documents, in the format specified by the
Project Officer/ Engineer, for each transformer installed.
2.5 Material Storage

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for storage of all materials and equipment delivered by him for the
work; and security of materials. The Contractor shall manage all labor, equipment, and vehicles to load
and transport said materials and equipment to the worksites.
2. Worksite
(a) Extended storage of materials along the routes of lines will not be permitted.
(b) Conductor reels may be spotted at the worksites for a short period prior to installation provided that
crating and reel lagging are intact to protect the items.
Poles may be spotted at structure locations for short periods prior to setting.
(c) All poles, and conductor placed at the worksites shall be located so that the items are not subject to
damage and do not impede pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
(d) Any damage caused by imprudent placement of equipment and materials by the
Contractor at the worksites shall be corrected by the Contractor, in a manner acceptable to the Project
Officer/ Engineer, at the Contractor’s cost.
3. Contractor's Storage Facility
The Contractor shall be financially responsible for the secure and proper storage of materials, prior to
installation of the materials and equipment, to prevent loss or damage to any materials. However
Contractor may use Project sub-stations premises subject to approval of concern Project Substation
Authorities.
2.6 Poles and Cross Arms
1. Pole Numbering
Poles and structures shall be numbered in accordance with a numbering system provided by Project
Officer/ Engineer. Each pole shall be marked permanently through template with the assigned number.
2. Pole Framing
Pole and structures shall generally be framed in accordance with Construction Standards and the
construction SDS. Where special framing requirements are necessary, the Site Engineer or Engineer shall
provide framing instructions for the specific structure.
Each cross-arm shall be attached to the pole by a pole clamp or by machined bolts of sufficient length to
pass completely through the holes provided on the pole and cross-arms and receive their full complement
of nuts.
Bolts of proper length shall be used. Excess nuts shall not be used to make use of a bolt, which would
otherwise be too long. The end of a machined bolt projecting more than 3 centimeters beyond the nut
shall be cut off to a length of 2 centimeters beyond the nut. Each bolt, when installed, shall have its full
complement of nuts.
Washers shall be used where specified in these standards. For wooden pole, bolted connection through
wood members should be drawn tight to allow for shrinkage of wood.
Bolts should be pulled up so that the wood is compressed but not so tight to break the wood fibers. Fiber
breaks on the surface of the pole increases probability of decay.
During the erection work at the field there may be necessity to modify galvanized steel hardware and may
have to be drilled, reamed, filed or cut. Under such a condition the area of the steel exposed, after these
modifications, shall be coated with a zinc-rich paint to protect the steel from corrosion.
2.7 Excavation
All excavations made for the installation, or demolition, of facilities shall be accomplished in a timely
manner according to the scheduled installation. Required excavations shall be opened, material installed,
and backfill placed, as specified, in a continuing operation to the greatest extent practicable. Any
excavation left open during discontinuous construction, which is accessible to the public or along public
thoroughfare, shall be covered or barricaded, and marked by suitable visual means, to prevent a public
hazard.
Excavations shall be properly located and sized for the intended use. Pole and stay plate anchor
excavations shall be correctly sized to retain undisturbed soil to the greatest extent consistent with the
means of excavation. Pole holes shall be made by power-driven auger or by manual methods; power-
driven shovel equipment shall not be used. Pole holes shall be excavated to the specified depth with no
tolerance shallow and tolerance of ten (10) centimeters deep. The bottom of pole holes shall be
undisturbed soil, gravel or rock. Stay plate holes shall be excavated by manual methods to specified depth
with no disturbed soil in the direction of the anchor rod.
All excavations shall be backfilled with excavated material, or as specified for the installation. Backfill
shall be free of foreign materials and shall be well tamped with excess backfill graded over the excavated
area to prevent depressions resulting from eventual natural compaction. The Contractor if so directed by
Project Officer/ Engineer shall remove large amounts of excess backfill from the site. If so directed by
Project Officer/ Engineer, the Contractor shall provide suitable backfill materials for excavations where
existing removed materials is insufficient, or inappropriate, to provide suitable grading of the excavated
area.
2.8 Pole Setting
Poles shall be set in accordance with the appropriate Sections of the Construction Standards.
Each pole shall be assigned a unique construction number at the time of structure staking for preliminary
identification and preparation of SDS.
Pole holes shall be dug large enough in diameter to admit a tamping bar all around the periphery of the
pole and shall have a uniform dimension as per the type of pole used at the top and bottom. Poles shall be
planted in the ground to the depth specified in construction.
Drawings before planting a pole, the bottom of the hole made for planting the pole, shall be cleaned of
free soil and firmly tamped, to prevent the hole from settling.
The stability of a pole, particularly a pole without stay, is greatly influenced by the size of the pole hole,
the nature of the soil and the care exercised in back filling and tamping. Two active hand tampers and one
slow shovel shall result in good compaction.
Poles shall be set to stand perpendicular except at terminals, angles and other points of excessive strain
where they shall be given a rake not to exceed 10 centimeters against the direction of strain. Poles located
at the sides of banks or other locations, where washouts may occur, shall be protected by suitable
cribbing, or shall be referred to the Engineer for recommended action.
After the pole is in position and the hole is back filled and tamped, soil shall be piled and packed firmly
around the pole. Pole setting shall be inspected prior to acceptance and any back fills that have sunk shall
be refilled.
Where it is necessary to set poles at locations where the soil has very low bearing value, or in swampy
conditions, a pole may be fitted with a bog shoe in accordance with construction drawings the engineer
may specify that type of construction.
Poles located in shallow riverbeds shall be protected by gabions as designated by the Site Engineer or
Engineer. Gabions should be approximately 2 meters x 1 meter x 1 meter. Four such gabions are required
for each pole. Set pole and pour 860 mm diameter foundation as per construction standard construction
drawing. Level areas around pole and set gabions in pattern shown in construction drawing.
It is important to lace adjacent gabions together along the perimeter of all contact surfaces.
Fill gabions with hard, durable, clean stone, 100 mm to 200 mm in size in three layers.
Install two connecting wires at each layer. Lace gabion lids securely making certain all edges are closed.
Fill void between pole and gabion with hard, durable, clean rock 200 mm minimum size.
2.9 Stays
1. Stay leads specified in construction documents are defined as the horizontal distance from the
centerline of the pole at ground line to the point where the anchor rod should enter the ground assuming
the ground to be level. For the correction in stay leads for uneven ground see construction drawing.
The Engineer, upon request, may designate the actual location of stay anchor rods on slope of hills. The
stay stake indicates the point where the anchor rod enters the ground. The anchor hole shall be dug
accordingly.
The attachment of one stay shall not overlap that of another stay when 2 or more stays are carried to a
pole or anchor. Each shall be entirely independent of the other. This does not prevent the use of multiple
eye rods for nuts designed for such use.
All stays to be installed on a pole line shall be placed and drawn reasonably taut before the conductors are
tensioned. After the conductors are tensioned and sagged to their final position, the stays shall be
carefully inspected to see that each is carrying its share of the load on the pole as intended. If multiple
stays are not carrying equal strain, the slack stay shall be pulled up until it is sharing load as intended.
Stay anchors must be installed full depth and set to pull against undisturbed soil to develop full tension.
An anchor not properly installed will move and allow movement of the top of the pole, thus slacking the
conductors. Stay anchors installed in soft or unstable earth shall be placed at specified depth and back
filled with 5 cm. maximum size crushed stone placed to a depth of 1 meter from the bottom of the pole.
2. Installation of Stays
Where stays are installed on a line angle structure, line of stay shall bisect the outside line angle. The span
of stay extending between poles shall not be greater than 60 meter. Anchor and anchor rods shall be set so
that the axis of the rod and line of stay shall be straight. The portion of the anchor rod above the ground
shall not be bent at an angle to connect a stay wire. If this occurs, anchor and anchor rod shall be reset.
The anchor rod shall not be exposed for more than 15 centimeters above the ground after the anchor is set.
If gravel back fill is required to set anchor in soft or unstable soil, as per construction drawing the
Contractor will have to carry out the gravel back fill as directed by Engineer.
If a stay is installed on a pole where low voltage conductor is dead ended or double dead ended and
extends past stay, a piece of plastic hose slit along the length shall be placed over the stay wire extending
from the upper stay attachment to 200 mm below lowest low voltage conductor. After installation, the
hose shall be wrapped with plastic tape and the hose shall be secured to the upper stay bolt with tie wire.
3. Stay Insulators
Stay insulators shall be installed on all stays in accordance with the construction drawings.
2.10 Conductor
Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) conductor shall be used for 33,11,0.4/0.23 kV overhead
lines.
1. Sagging
Conductors shall be sagged in accordance with the sag chart specified by these specifications.
The importance of careful sagging of conductors cannot be over emphasized. Conductors have definite
characteristic that control their behavior resulting from changes of temperature, wind speed and additional
load due to ice or wet snow.
Conductors must not be sagged too tightly (less than specified sag) as unspecified extra tensions may
result in failure of conductor structure. Conductors sagged too loosely (more than specified sag) may
contact adjacent conductors hardware or any structure.
2. Sag Charts
Unless otherwise noted, all sag charts are calculated on the basis of 35 kg/m2 wind pressure. Sag is
always measured vertically, without wind, when conductors are being installed or re-sagged. Unless
otherwise specified by the Site Engineer or Engineer for a specific condition, initial or stringing sag shall
be applied to the installation of all new unstressed conductors. The initial sag is always less than the final
sag. The most practical method of obtaining the correct sag is by sighting between two adjacent
structures. Choose the structure, which is reasonably the same elevation Sags for the various temperatures
shall be furnished by the Engineer in a table form for spans not covered by the sag chart.
In order to ascertain the sag for a given stringing temperature, select the point corresponding to the proper
temperature on the scale on the left-hand side of the sag chart. Lay a straight edge so that it passes
through this point and the point of the center scale representing the length of span to be sagged. The
straight edge will then indicate the proper stringing sag on the right-hand scale. Interpolate if the
temperature of span is not exactly the same as designated on the chart. The low voltage neutral conductor
shall be sagged with the same sag as the low voltage phase conductor. If the low voltage conductor, as a
group, has less design sag than the high voltage phase conductor installed above it, the low voltage
conductor, as a group, shall be installed to the same sag as the high voltage conductors installed above.
The sag of pre stressed conductors such as installed with a tensioning machine shall be specified by the
Engineer for the job.
3. Stringing
All cable grip used for the installation of conductors shall be of the type designed to prevent injury to the
conductor.
Attach targets to each structure at a distance below each point of the support of conductor equal to the
required sag. Sight from one target to the other. The line of sight between targets may be horizontal or
inclined. Draw the conductor up to the proper sag, which will be reached when its lowest point will be in
line with the target.
Where terrain and / or length of span in such that the targets would fall below the ground line, the
difference in elevation between the lower conductor attachment and the lowest point of sag, sag below
lowest support will be furnished by the engineer in the tabular form.
The dynamometers and similar apparatus shall be used for tensioning of conductor to obtain appropriate
sagging of conductors. Dynamometer shall be used only when the sight method is not feasible.
Dynamometer shall be checked for accuracy before using.
For stringing of ACSR conductors of all sizes, stringing rollers or roller shall be used to support the
conductor as it is pulled out and sagged. Stringing rollers shall be used regardless of size of aluminum
conductors, bare or covered.
Stringing rollers shall be suspended at each insulator support position so that the conductor shall roll
smoothly over the roller-protecting conductor from any physical damage.
Stringing sheaves shall have a diameter at least 20 times the conductor diameter and so finished as to
prevent damage of any kind to the conductor as it is pulled through the sheaves.
Conductor drum shall be located at a sufficient distance from the first structure to avoid excessive
bending of the conductor over the sheaves and excessive downward loading on the cross-arms.
Attention shall be paid to the fact that all sag charts contained herein for ACSR conductors are calculated
on the basis of non pre-stressed conductor. For this reason, at no time during the stringing or sagging
operation, shall conductors of this type be pulled to sag, which are less than those shown by the charts.
Special care shall be taken at all times to prevent the conductor from becoming kinked, twisted or abraded
in any manner. Where it is necessary to drag conductors on the ground, the conductors shall be protected
by covering all stones or other objects, which might damage the conductor with boughs or trees or
suitable pieces of lumber. These requirements are especially important when ACSR conductor is being
handled on river crossing spans.
Floats with rollers shall be used to prevent the conductor from dragging along the river bottom.
In stringing conductors across highways, the conductors shall be fully protected from passing vehicles by
use of temporary guard structures.
4. Damaged Conductor
Damaged conductors shall be repaired by using a repair sleeve provided that no more than 2strands of the
outer aluminum layer are damaged and further provided that none of the sleeve core strands are damaged.
For a conductor damaged in excess of the above conditions, the damaged section of the conductor shall be
cut out and a tension splice installed.
When cutting out damaged section of conductor, no more than 1 tension splice shall be permitted in a
span and no splice is made within 8 meters of an insulator attachment.
5. Sag Error
Sag error shall not exceed ± 40 mm from the sag defined by the sag chart.
6. Conductor Attachment
Conductors shall be secured to pin insulators with pre-formed conductor ties or with tie wire. Insulator
ties, except at jumper supports in structures, shall be made with pre-formed ties when available.
Conductors shall be connected to dead end assemblies with tension set.
7. Line Splices for Tensioning and Looping
Cleaned and polished contact surfaces are necessary to make conductor splices so that it shall remain free
from trouble. Great care shall be taken to completely clean the strands of aluminum conductor. The
splicing sleeve must be centered over the conductor ends before compressing to make a splice of required
strength.
Appropriate sleeve shall be used for splicing ACSR conductors prior to installation. The outer strands of
aluminum shall be carefully cleaned with a wire brush to remove all foreign matter till the aluminum
shines brightly. The cleaning applies to both new and old conductors. The manufacturer pre-filled with
inhibitor compound supplies splicing sleeves for aluminum conductor.
Splices in line conductors shall be so located that the end of the splicing sleeve is at least 30 cm from the
end of a suspension or dead end clamp. Non-tension loops, such as between dead ends, shall be spliced
with a connector when the conductors are of same metal and size.
8. Connectors
Cleaned and polished contact surfaces are necessary to make electrical connections that will be free from
trouble. Tap connectors are supplied by manufacturers pre-filled with inhibitor compound. Excess
inhibitor compound shall not to be removed but it shall be wiped over the connector as a moisture seal.
Connectors shall not be covered or taped.
Compression connectors shall be located in such a manner that there shall be at least 30 cm of conductor
between the end of the connector and the end of a dead end Connectors shall be installed on non-
tensioned portion of the conductor such as loops in preference to the conductor in the span. Connectors
installed on conductor shall be located in a span adjacent to the crossing rather than the crossing span
when practicable. Aluminum compression connectors, pre-filled with inhibitor compound, shall be
compressed on the cleaned area of aluminum conductor. Where necessary, inhibitor compound shall be
applied to the cleaned conductor and connector before assembly.
9. Conductor Accessories
Pre-Formed Ties and Grips
Taps for jumpers and services shall not be made over the legs of ties or dead end grips.
Pin Insulator Ties
Pin insulator ties are of 2 types:
a. With single top grooves: Single top ties may be used to turn line angles to 7 degrees where single
insulators are permitted. Please refer construction drawing for specific applications.
b. With side grooves with specific size of ties for specific conductor in each tie style: Specific usage is
dictated by insulator pin loading and use of single insulators as specified in construction drawing.
Shackle Insulator Ties
Shackle insulator ties are furnished in one type with specific size of ties for specific conductor. Shackle
ties may be used to turn line angles at 20 degree. At the line angles, the conductor shall be located on the
side of the vertically installed shackle insulator that causes the conductor to be forced against the shackle
insulator. Angle loading shall not be imposed on the ties itself.
Preformed Stay Wire Binder
Preformed stay wire binder for stay wire are furnished as per construction drawing. Preformed stay wire
binder are right hand lay. Preformed stay wire binder may be removed and replaced up to 3 times, when
initially installed, to permit adjustment of stay tension. When applying ties or grips the manufacturer’s
identification tag and colour coding shall be checked to insure that the tie or grip is the right unit specified
for application on the specific conductor or wire strand. Perform for stay wire are furnished with 2
crossover markings. When applying preform on hardware, the grip shall be installed using the crossover
point closest to the loop of the grip.
Compression Fittings
Full-tension conductor splices and repair sleeves are furnished for all conductors to be installed.
a. Full Tension Conductor Splice
Full-tension spliced for ACSR conductor is provided in a 2/1-piece unit. Full tension conductor splices
will develop full conductivity of the conductor and a minimum of 95% of the rated conductor breaking
strength. Please see construction drawing for splicing instructions.
b. Repair Sleeves
Conductor repair sleeves are furnished for all conductors to be used to restore the rated current carrying
capacity of conductors with broken strands. Repair splices have no tension rating.
10. PG Clamps
PG clamps are furnished in a full range of sizes for application in the non-tension connection in 33, 11 kV
circuits. The PG clamps are designed for general use in making tap and jumper connections of various
types.
In all applications of PG clamp fittings, the conductor metal shall be wire-brushed to a bright condition to
remove surface oxidation on the conductor.
11. Application
When applying ties or grips the manufacturer’s identification tag and colour coding shall be checked to
insure that the tie or grip is the right unit specified for application on the specific conductor or wire strand.
Preformed for stay wire are furnished with 2 crossover markings. When applying preformed on hardware,
the grip shall be installed using the crossover point closest to the loop of the grip. In all applications of PG
clamp fittings, the conductor metal shall be wire-brushed to a bright condition to remove surface
oxidation on the conductor.
12. Line Construction
Arrangement of Conductor
The standard position of 33, 11 kV phase conductors on the cross-arm in the normal triangular
configuration looking from the normal source of power supply shall be seen as: Red (R) on top of the
pole, Yellow (Y) on right hand end of the cross-arm and Blue (B) on left hand end of the cross arm.
Attachments to Poles
Bolt holes are provided on poles for cross-arms, cross-arm braces and stay bolts.
Conductor Ties
Pre-formed ties and grips shall be used for attaching conductors to structures when available.
If pre-formed materials are not available, the wire shall be soft conductor so that when made up, the tie
wire will bind the conductor tightly. No tie wire shall be used for a second time. Tie wire shall be of the
same metal as that of the bare conductor to which the tie is applied.
Conductor Support
The conductor supports on straight lines shall be carried on the top wire groove of the pin insulator.
Conductors shall be attached to the side conductor groove of pin insulator on the outside of angles so that
transverse conductor tension will tend to hold the conductor in the insulator groove.
Conductor ties shall not hold a conductor on the insulator when uplift exists. If uplift is found, it is
required to consult with the Site Engineer or the Engineer to determine remedial action to be taken.
13. Pole Wiring
All taps or connections passing from one level to another on the pole shall, as far as possible, be vertical.
Connections shall have sufficient length so that the line conductors are not moved from normal positions
and normal movement is not restricted. Connections shall have at least 30 centimeters clearance from
other conductors. Any connection carried from one side of the pole to the other side shall be supported on
pin insulators.
Installation Criteria
13.1. The line alignment should be as straight as possible to minimize requirements for stays.
The basic span shall be maintained within the following limits:-
33 kV line: 50m to 55 m
11 kV line: 50m to 55 m
Low voltage and composite line:
S. No. No of wire Span in meter
1. 4 wire 35-40
2. 3 wire 40-45
3. 2 wire 45-50
13.2. The entire construction works shall be performed as per the construction units specified. Whenever
the construction unit does not cover any specific activity, the Contractor and the Project Officer/ Engineer
shall mutually settle the cost as per the man-hour involvement for the same and according to the labor rate
quoted by the Contractor in his Bid.
13.3. Detailed schedules of material to be used are provided in each structure drawing of the construction
standards. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to judge the appropriateness of the listed material
according to the site conditions. If there is any need for addition/reduction or deviation from the listed
material size/quantity, the Contractor shall ask the Project Officer/ Engineer for the approval of the same.
13.4. All types of line clearances shall be maintained as per the construction standards provided to the
Contractor. Deviations from the standards may be allowed only for unique or special conditions.
13.5. Safety rules of the Project Officer/ Engineer shall be strictly observed at all times by the Project
Officer/ Engineer and the Contractor and their personnel. Special care shall be taken to maintain the
optimum conductor sag to provide adequate safety to the construction and the property or people.
13.6. All fastenings (e.g. preforms, nut bolts, stays and the like) shall be so installed that the constructed
line components shall not fail to remain within the safety margin while maximum working load is
applied.
13.7. If the Contractor requires clarification of any construction standard or unit or he feels any doubt in
his interpretation of construction activities he should clarify the points with the Project Officer/ Engineer
in writing and the decision thus made shall be valid for further work.
13.8. HV Insulators: The Contractor shall use HV pin insulators in the alignment of the line where the
break angle does not exceed the limits provided hereafter.
S. No Conductor Size in mm2 Minimum Break Angle in Degrees
1 50 (Rabbit) 15.5
In the case where the break angle exceeds the above values the Contractor shall make dead end at the
angle structure and use disc insulator fittings.
Installation of Stays
1. The Contractor, in general, shall install at least one stay for the supports in the following cases
(a) Dead end structure
(b) Tee-off (Tap) structure
2. Stay may not be installed in the following conditions
HV Line (33, 11 kV) with 11 m Pole
a) - Conductor 3x100 mm2
Span 75 m (max)
Break angle: 4 deg.
b) - Conductor 3x50 mm2
Span 75 m (max)
Break angle: 5.5 deg.
c) - Conductor 3x30 mm2
Span 75 m (max)
Composite (HV +LV) line with 11 m pole
a) - Conductor 3x100 mm2 HV; 3x50 mm2+30 mm2 LV
Span 40 m (max)
Break angle: 2 deg.
b) - Conductor 3x50 mm2 HV; 3x30 mm2+1x30 mm2 LV
Span 50 m (max)
For conditions different from the above, the Contractor shall provide calculations showing the number of
stays necessary and get approval from Project Officer/ Engineer prior to installation.
2.11 Safety
1. The Contractor shall take all measures required to safeguard the public, public and private property
from any hazard to life, limb, or property, which may arise during the performance of the construction of
the works. Such measures shall include, but not be limited to barricades, signs, newspaper
announcements, traffic control by police, or other advisory and control methods deemed appropriate.
2. The Contractor shall provide his work force with all tools and equipment in sufficient numbers and
quality to perform all aspects of the works in a safe manner. The Contractor shall provide protective
headgear for all members of his workforce, and shall provide protective clothing as required for specific
tasks. The Contractor shall instruct his work Force in proper and safe construction techniques and shall
continuously monitor compliance with safety instructions throughout the period of the Contract.
3. The Contractor shall provide, and require use of, protective grounding equipment when:
a) Work is being performed on lines adjacent, either in extension of, or parallel to, energized circuits.
b) Work is being performed on isolated circuits after conductors have been installed. The Contractor shall
maintain all tools and equipment in good working order. All mechanized equipment shall have adequate
safety mechanisms and guards in place and be fully operational. Operators of such equipment shall be
skilled and fully trained in the operation of such equipment.
4. The Contractor shall provide and maintain emergency medical supplies to cover with accidents and
snakebites for his work force on a readily available basis. The Contractor shall also instruct all
supervisory personnel in the action to be taken in the event of serious injury, and the sources and
locations of professional medical assistance, which shall be employed in such cases.
5. The Contractor shall apply all accidental insurance policies to his work force for an accident occurring
during the working period of the construction.
Tests
6. The Contractor shall furnish the electrical test equipment and personnel to perform electrical tests of
equipment and circuits, as specified by, and under the supervision of the Project Officer/ Engineer.
7. The Contractor shall meggar all circuits installed with a motor-driven megger or equivalent instrument
to demonstrate the acceptable insulation characteristics of the line prior to energization and Provisional
Acceptance. 400/230 V overhead circuits shall be tested at 500 volts AC.
8. The Contractor shall conduct DC hi-potential tests on all underground circuits, after makeup but prior
to backfilling. The test shall be made with DC hi-potential test set capable of nondestructively testing the
cable at approximately 300% of cable voltage rating.
9. The Contractor shall megger all transformers with a motor-driven megger prior to connection to the LV
network.
10. All tests specified shall be conducted during suitable atmospheric conditions under the supervision
and witness of the Project Officer/ Engineer. All test results shall be documented and signed by both
parties.
2.12 Demolition
17.1 The Contractor shall perform the removal of all existing facilities in accordance with the specific
directions of the Authorized Personnel. All materials removed shall remain the property of Project
Officer/ Engineer and the Contractor shall deliver all salvaged materials to the Project Officer/ Engineer
warehouse, or as specifically directed by the Branch Chief in writing.
2.13 Clean-up
1. The Contractor shall ensure that all worksites shall be free of all manner of debris resulting from the
construction activity.
2. All crating, conductor reels, packaging materials, conductor scraps, and other miscellaneous items are
removed from the workplace. All holes resulting from removal of facilities shall be filled. If trees or brush
have been cut or trimmed, all cuttings shall be removed. The worksites shall be left in clean natural
conditions.
3. Site cleanup shall be an integral part of the Provisional Acceptance process, and no line section shall be
provisionally accepted unless all cleanup work has been accomplished.
2.14 Tree Cutting and Trimming
1. Any tree cutting or tree trimming shall be accomplished by the Contractor in coordination with CBO.
2. All cutting shall be removed by the Contractor with disposition of cutting as specified by Project
Officer/ Engineer.
2.15 Interruptions to Existing Service
1. The Contractor shall arrange for interruptions of service to existing lines with Project Officer/
Engineer. Every effort shall be made to limit such interruptions to the minimum.
2. If it is possible to maintain service to a section of line by constructing temporary facilities approved by
Project Officer/ Engineer, the Contractor shall detail man hours and classification of personnel required to
construct such facilities and submit to Project Officer/ Engineer for approval prior to any work being
CHAPTER 3. TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

(To be completed by the bidder)
* Note: The bidder shall mention clause by clause comment of the required specification. The bidder shall
state the following at the indicated field.
a. “FULLY COMPLIANT" if the item offered fully meet the quotation requirement.
b. "PARTIALLY COMPLIANT" if the item offered meet the requirement partially. The bidder shall state
the reason why the offer is partially compliant. In such cases, the bidder shall clearly mention the extent
to which other specifications are offered.
c. "NON COMPLIANT" if the item cannot meet the requirements. The bidder shall also state reasons for
it.
3.1 ACSR Conductor
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Copies of fabrication standards attached? Yes/No
3. If standards are other than BS: 215 / IEC: 209 (Part II)
Then conductor specifications are same as
BS: 215 / IEC: 209 requirements in respect of the following?
Diameter Yes/No
Strand size Yes/No
Direction of lay Yes/No
Lay ratio Yes/No
Materials Yes/No
4. Technical data:
Code Name Nominal Stranding Breaking Mass (kg/m) Resistance at
Area(sqmm) (Al/Steel) Strength (KN) 20degreeC/ohm/km
Rabbit
Squirrel
Bidders Remarks……………………………………………………...
Signature:……………………………………
As representative for……………………………………
Address
Date
3.2 Steel Tubular Pole
Description Queries (Yes/No)
Overall Length 11m 10m 9m 8m
SECTION
1. (I) TOP
Length
Outside Diameter
Thickness
(II) MIDDLE
Length
Outside Diameter
Thickness
(III) BOTTOM
Length
Outside Diameter
Thickness
2. Application of Load from top
3. Approximate weight
4. Crippling Load
5. Load for Permanent set test
6 Load for temporary deflection test
7. Breaking Load
Bidders Remarks………..……………………..
Signature………………………………
As representative for……………………………
Address…………………………………………..
Date……………………………………………
3.3 Porcelain Insulators
Pin Insulators
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog
3. Model number
4. Applicable standards
5. Copies of standards attached Yes/No
6. If not IS Standards, are standards used equivalent? Yes/No
7. Copies of alternate standard attached? Yes/No
8. Ratings:
Highest system voltage kV
Rated voltage kV
Creepage distance (min) mm
Wet frequency puncture withstand voltage kV
Impulse withstand voltage kV
Puncture power frequency voltage (min) kV
Visible discharge voltage kV
Cantilever strength kN
G I pin head
Bidders Remarks…………………………………..
Signature……………………………………
As representative for……………………….
Address……………………………………..
Date……………………………………………
3.4 Disc Insulators

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog No.
3. Model number
4. Applicable standard
5. Copies of standards attached? Yes/No
6. If not IS standards are standards used equivalent? Yes/No
7. Copies of alternate standard attached? Yes/No
8. Ratings:
Rate voltage kV
Porcelain diameter (min) mm
Spacing mm
Power frequency puncture
Withstand voltage kV
Wet frequency puncture
Withstand voltage kV
Impulses withstand voltage kV
Puncture power frequency voltage (min) kV
Visible discharge voltage kV
Mechanical strength kN
Ball and socket size mm
Bidders Remarks…………………………………………
Signature………………………………………
As representative for…………………………………………
Address……………………………………….
Date……………………………………
3.5 Stay Insulator
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog No.
3. Model number
4. Applicable standards
5. Copies of standards attached? Yes/No
6. If not IS standards, are standards
Used equivalent? Yes/No
7. Copies of alternate standards attached? Yes/No
8. Ratings:
Rated voltage kV
Minimum failing load kN
Power frequency withstand voltage, 1 minute
Dry kV
Wet kV
IS designation
Bidders Remarks……………………………………………….
Signature………………………………………………..
As representative for……………………………………
Address………………………………………………….
Date…………………………………………….
3.6 Insulator Pins
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Type of steel used
3. Dimensional drawings attached? Yes/No
4. Copies of type test attached? Yes/No
5. Ratings and features
For 11 kV
Head type
Total length mm
Stalk length mm
Shank length mm
Minimum failing load kN
Applicable standard
Catalog number
Bidders Remarks……………..……………………..
Signature……………………………………………………
As representative for………………………………………..
Address…………………………………………………….
Date…………………………………………………………
3.7 Disc Insulator Fittings

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer/Catalogue No.
2. Preliminary drawings furnished? Yes/No
3. Steel Classification
4. Malleable tension clamp? Yes/No
5. Cotter pin and U-bolts are galvanized? Yes/No
6. Cotter pins are stainless steel? Yes/No
7. Galvanizing conforms to IS: 2629 – 1985? Yes/No
8. Ultimate strength of clamps
9. Applicable standard(s)
Bidders Remarks……………………………………………..
Signature……………………………………………………
As representative for………………………………………
Address…………………………………………………….
Date……………………………………………………….
3.8 Cross Arms and Bracing Angles
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
3. Minimum tensile strength of steel
4. Is the cross arm and angles fabricated from
hot-rolled steel sections? Yes/No
5. Governing Standard
6. Standard attached? Yes/No
6. Governing Standard for galvanizing
7. Drawings of cross arm and bracing? Yes/No
Bidders Remarks……………………..
Signature……………………………………………..
As representative for…………………………………
Address……………………………………………….
Date…………………………………………………..
3.9 Flat Cross Arm Brace

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
3. Minimum tensile strength of steel
4. Is the flat cross arm brace fabricated from
hot-rolled steel sections? Yes/No
5. Governing Standard for manufacturing and
testing
6. Governing Standard for galvanizing
7. Standards attached? Yes/No
8. Drawings of flat cross arm brace? Yes/No
Signature………………………………………..
As representative for…………………………..
Address…………………………………………
Date…………………………………………………
3.10 Pole Clamps

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Steel classification
3. Referenced galvanizing specification
4. Drawings of pole clamp furnished?
Signature………………………………………………
As representative for………………………………….
Address………………………………………………..
Date……………………………………………………
3.11 Galvanized Steel Nuts and Bolts
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Material description Yes/No
Furnished?
3. Governing standard for manufacturing and testing
4. Governing standard for galvanization
6. Catalog numbers attached
for all items? Yes/No
Signature……………………………………………….
As representative for………………………………….
Address………………………………………………..
Date…………………………………………………..
3.12 Ground (Earth) Rods and Clamps

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Material Description Yes/No
furnished?
3. Governing Standard for manufacturing
and testing
4. Governing Standard for galvanization
6. Catalog/ dimensional drawings
attached for all items? Yes/No
7. Dimensions (Ground Rod):
Length mm.
Diameter mm.
8. Catalog number
Rod
Clamp
9. Copies of type test results
attached? Yes/No
Bidders Remarks………………..……………………..
Signature…………………………………………………
As representative for………………………………………
Address………………………………………………..
Date……………………………………………………..
3.13 Grounding Conductor
Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Governing Standard for manufacturing
and testing
3. Governing Standard for galvanization
5. Diameter mm
6. Cross Section sq. mm
7. Short time fusing
30 cycles Amps
8. Weight (Approx.) kg/km
9. Resistance at 20 degree C (Approx.) ohms/km
Bidders Remarks…………….……………………..
Signature……………………………………………….
As representative for…………………………………….
Address…………………………………………………….
Date………………………………………………………..
3.14 Stay Rod

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalogue Numbers
4. Load rating kg
5. Type tests-tensile load data attached? Yes/No
6. Type test-bend test data attached? Yes/No
7. Drawing attached? Yes/No
Signature…………………………………………
As representative for……………………………….
Address…………………………………………….
Date……………………………………………….
3.15 Stranded Stay Wire

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Strand diameter (overall) mm
3. No. of Strands
4. Minimum Breaking load kg
5. Nominal diameter of coated
6. Left hand lay Yes/No
7. Fabrication Specification
B.S. 183 1972 (1983) mm
8. If not what standard? Yes/No
9. Standard copies (2) attached Yes/No
10. If not B.S. 183 is strand offered equivalent in all
respects? Yes/No
11. Class of zinc coating?
Bidders Remarks…………………………………..
Signature…………………………………..
As representative for………………………
Address…………………………………..
Date………………………………………
3.16 Disconnect Switch

Description Queries
1. Manufacturer
2. Catalog number
3. Copy of test data per
IEC Standard 265 attached? Yes/No
4. Rating:
Design Voltage kV
Continuous Current Amps
Momentary rating (r.m.s) Amps
Impulse Withstand (BIL) kV
Min Power Frequency
Withstand:
1 minute dry kV
10 seconds wet kV
Insulator creepage distance mm
Insulator dry arc distance mm
Open gap dry arc distance mm
5. Dimensioned drawing attached? Yes/No
Signature………………………………………
As representative for…………………………..
Address………………………………………..
Date…………………………………………………
CHAPTER 4. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

4.1 Inspection and Test
4.1.1 Line Materials
1. The whole of the Works supplied under the Contract shall be subject to inspection and tests by the
Employer or its representatives during manufacture, erection and after completion. The inspections and
tests shall include, but not limited to, the requirements of this section of the technical specifications. Each
of the material and equipment to be manufactured, supplied and erected specified in the Price Schedule
with Technical Preamble shall be inspected, tested and commissioned as specified in the Technical
Specification under the contract. Project Officer/ Engineer shall notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of
the identity of any representatives retained for these purposes.
2. The inspections and tests shall be conducted on the premises of the Manufacturers/Contractor or its
subcontractor(s) and at the item of materials & equipment’s final destination in Nepal if required. If the
inspection and test of the items of materials & equipment are to be conducted on the premises of the
Manufacturers/Contractor or its subcontractor(s), all reasonable facilities and assistance within the
premises of the manufacturer, including access to drawings and production data, shall be furnished to the
inspectors at no charge to Project Officer/ Engineer. Items which are not physically tested in the
manufacturer's premises the sample of such items shall be provided for the approval from the department.
The costs associated with inspection/tests including the Local transportation and accommodation, for
goods to be supplied from third countries or to be supplied from/ within Nepal for inspector/s shall be
seven days and Inspectors' expenses shall be borne by the Manufacturers/Contractor. Travelling and Daily
allowances of inspector shall be borne by the Employer.
3. Should any inspected or tested items of materials and equipment fail to conform to the specifications,
the inspectors can reject them, and the CONTRACTOR shall either replace the rejected items of materials
and equipment or make all alterations necessary to meet the requirements of the specifications as directed
by Project Officer/ Engineer, free of cost to Project Officer/ Engineer.
4. Project Officer/ Engineer's right to inspect, test and, where necessary, reject the items of materials and
equipment after their arrival in Nepal shall in no way be limited or waived by reasons of the items of
materials and equipment having previously been inspected, tested and passed by Project Officer/ Engineer
or its representatives prior to the shipment from the country of origin.
6. The Employer may waive the inspection and test of some of the items of material & equipment. But the
test report of such items (which are not physically tested in the manufacturer’s premises in presence of
Employer's Inspectors) must be sent to the Employer for approval.
4.2 Construction Works
1. The Contractor shall, by means of continuing inspection/supervision by his staff, ensure that all works
constructed and installed comply with the Technical Specifications, Price Schedule with Technical
Preambles, Construction Standards, and any amending instructions thereto issued by the Authorized
Personnel of Employer.
2. The Authorized Personnel shall, by means of continuing inspection by his staff, ensure that all works
completed by the Contractor conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and that high
standards of Workmanship are maintained by the Contractor. Such inspections shall be fully documented
in accordance with the procedures determined by the Authorized Personnel of Project Officer/ Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by the General Specifications, under the supervision of
the Authorized Personnel. Such tests shall be fully documented by the Contractor in a form provided by
the Authorized Personnel. The Contractor shall provide copies of test documentation to the Authorized
Personnel.
4. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, test equipment, and other materials or equipment required
to conduct the tests in accordance with the Technical Specification, Price Schedule with Technical
Preambles, Construction Standard etc.
4.3 Quality Assurance
To assure that the supply and services under the scope of this Contract whether manufactured or
performed within the Contractor’s works or at his subcontractor’s premises or at the Site or at any other
place of work, are in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable quality
assurance program to control such activities at all points necessary. Such program shall be outlined by the
Contractor and shall be finally accepted by the Employer after discussions before the award of the
Contract. A quality assurance program of the Contractor shall generally cover, but not be limited to the
following:
a. His organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality assurance
program.
b. Documentation control system.
c. Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel.
d. The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components, and selection of subcontractors’ services
including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, and verification of
materials purchases.
e. System for shop manufacturing including process controls and fabrication and assembly controls.
f. Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions.
g. Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing equipment. viii. Inspection and test
procedure for manufacture.
h. System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.
i. System for quality audits.
j. System for authorizing release of manufactured products to the Employer.
k. System for maintenance of records.
l. System for handling storage and delivery.
m. A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopting for controlling the quality
characteristics relevant to each item of supply.
The quality plan shall be mutually discussed and approved by the Employer after incorporating necessary
corrections by the Contractor as may be required.
4.4 Quality Assurance Documents
The Contractor shall be required to submit all the Quality Assurance Documents as stipulated in the
Quality Plan at the time of Employer’s inspection of material/equipment.
The Employer, through his duly authorized representatives, reserves the right to carry out Quality Audit
and Quality Surveillance of the systems and the procedures of the Contractor’s and the subcontractor’s
Quality Management and Control Activities.
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirement Specifications (Training Requirements ) 6-2 -166
Training Requirement for Operation and Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide training to the Employer's personnel (Manger-1, Operator-3, and Electrician-5)
to establish a well-trained operation and maintenance crew. The training shall be based on Operation and
Maintenance Manual for the project which will be prepared by the Contractor.
If the specifications and/or drawings of these Tender Documents do not contain particulars of materials or
works which are obviously necessary for the proper and safe completion, operation and maintenance of the
equipment in question, all such materials and works shall be deemed to be included in the supply.
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirement Specifications (Training Requirements ) 6-2 -167
Requirement for Operation and Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment and materials for proper operation and Maintenance
of the whole system for 1 year. The Contractor shall prepare operation and maintenance manual based on
Operation and Maintenance for Small Hydro Power Plants Manual, April 2003 prepared by Small Hydro
Power Promotion Project, GTZ which is attached as Annex VI of Bid document for reference.
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirement Specifications (General Items ) 6-2 -168
Specification of General Items:

1. Site Office space/Residence and laboratories facilities to the Employer
The Contractor shall provide Site office/Residence minimum 2 rooms with size at least
4.0m x 3.5m each with separate bathroom and toilet, fully furnished to accommodate
construction site supervision team for use as office cum residence. and adjustment of
laboratories equipment.
2. Laboratory facilities
The Contractor shall provide Laboratory facilities minimum 1 rooms with size at least
4.0m x 3.5m to accommodate Laboratory Equipment for :
• Sieve shaker with sieve sets
Coarse series – 80 mm to 4.75mm
Fine series – 4.75 mm to 0.75mm
• Slump test
• Cube Mold 15x15x15cm
• Compression Testing Machine 25Ton (M25 upto)
• Hydrometer
• Weighing Machine Digital
• Table and Chairs
3. Laptop Specification:
1 TB HDD 1.86 GHZ 17.3 Inches Full HD LED Notebook
Hardware Interface: SATA
RAM Frequency: 1600 MHZ
Memory Slots: 1
Cache: 4MB
Processor Brand: Intel
Processor Type: Intel core i7
Usage: Gaming
Laptop Type: Notebook
Dimension(WxDxH)mm : 0
Weight: 3.2 Kg
Warranty: 1 year
Features: Back lit English Keyboard
Storage Type: HDD
Operating System: Windows 10
Clock Speed: 1.86 GHZ
Periperhals: Keyboard, Speakers
Processor Speed: 1.86 GHZ
RAM: 16 GB
Bidding Document for Khatyad Khola Birabagar Sera MHP Procurement of Works-Small Contract Single-Stage: Two-Envelope
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirement Specifications (General Items ) 6-2 -169
RAM Expandable Memory: Upto 16 GB

RAM Type: DDR3
Resolution: 1920x1080
Screen Sizes(Inches): 17.3
Touchscreen: Yes
Graphics Solution: Nvidia GT750M
Screen Type: LED
Display Type: Full HD
Storage Capacity: 1 TB
Power Supply: 65 W AC
Ethernet: 10/100
Bluetooth: v4.0
Wireless LAN: 802.11 b/g/n
USB Port: 4x USB 3.0
Variant: 4500U
4. A3 Printer Specification:
Canon iR2004N A3 laser highly efficient black-and-white copying, network
printing scanning
Bidding Document for Khatyad Khola Birabagar Sera MHP Procurement of Works-Small Contract Single-Stage: Two-Envelope
Supplementary Information 6-4-1
LOWER BOM KHOLA MINI HYDRO PROJECT- SUPPLEMENTARY

INFORMATION
1. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT AREA, LOCATION AND CHARACTERISTICS
Lower Bom Khola Mini Hydropower Project (LBKMHP) is located in Chaurikharka VDC of
Solukhumbu District. The proposed head works site is located at Chyan tole near Powerhouse of
existing 20KW hydropower from the same Khola. The proposed head works site is located about a km
upstream from Handigaon and the powerhouse site is located at a km above the Surke. Waterways and
all the hydraulic structures are proposed along the Left Bank of the river.
1.1 Physical Features

1.1.1 Accessibility
The access road is required to transport various construction materials as well as machinery plants,
equipment to project site for construction purpose and to facilitate operation and maintenance
activities in future. But unfortunately it takes three days walk from the road head to the site, so all the
construction materials have to be arranged locally or should be air lifted by the chopper or airplanes.
At present, the nearest road head is at Salleri Bazaar. The shortest route to access the project site via
road is Kathmandu– Ghurmi–Salleri but here onwards there is no another option other than hiring
manpower or jokpes to carry materials and from Salleri to Lukla, it is around 40KM. Therefore, the
transportation of construction materials and machinery plants to the site seems quite difficult via
roads. There is one domestic airport near the site in Solukhumbu district named Lukla Airport. It takes
about 60 minutes flight from Kathmandu to Lukla airport. The airport is around 3 Km far from the
head works and 6km from the powerhouse site.
1.1.2 Communication Facilities

Though seems remote area in the geological map, every modes of communications are available in
this project area except in the powerhouse area. NTC CDMA phones can be used for site
communication purpose. Besides, NTC and NCELL cell phones are also widely used in the vicinity.
So, communication won’t be a great problem in this site unlike other site in our country.
1.1.3 Transmission and Distribution Networks

The power generated from the project, at present, is distributed to different wards of Chaurikharka
VDCs of Solukhumbu district. The power is generated at low voltage and distributed at 11 kV
transmission line within the VDCs. The design and construction of transmission and distribution
networks will be done considering economy, structures required for the hydropower project in all
aspects.
1.1.4 Topography
Lower Bom Khola Mini Hydropower Project (LBKMHP) is a conceived as a run-of-river type (RoR)
project located in Solukhumbu district of the Eastern Development Region, Nepal. The project area
lies in the high mountain with draining area of 9.69 km2. Bom Khola flows from East to West and
merging with Dudh Koshi. The terrace land at the downstream of proposed headworks site on the left
bank is suitable for the construction of settling basin. River bed consists pebbles, gravels and large
boulders. According to the data taken and analyzed, the site seems suitable for the construction of
hydropower project in all aspects.
1.2 Characteristics of the Project Area

1.2.1 Project area and facilities
The target area covers two wards of Chauri Kharka VDC of Solukhumbu District. The number of
households in the proposed load centers is 402 with the population of about 1,859.
1.2.2 Household energy consuming activities

The main sources of energy in rural areas of Nepal are fuel wood, agriculture residue and kerosene.
Activities like cooking and heating are mostly carried out with firewood. Lighting is another
important activity performed in the household though some part of the area are lighted by means of
existing mini hydro and some of them are using solar. After the Mini hydro installation they can get
good light at cheaper price. Lighting hours per day in rural areas are about six. However, the lighting
hours in this project will be according to the tourist season because of their own need is much lower
than what they need in peak season.
1.2.3 Socio-economic condition and affordability

The dominant ethnic groups of the project area comprise Janajatis followed by others. Tourism is the
main occupation of the people. Though, the economic condition of the people varies from poor to
medium rich, the living standard of the majority people is average. But in any case, it was observed
that most of the people could afford electricity at their required level.
1.2.4 Environmental consideration

The Lower Bom Khola mini hydropower project (LBKMHP) is situated in Chaurikharka-8 Bom
Khola of Solukhumbu district. The existing environmental status of the project area at the site was
gathered during this feasibility study. The main objective of this study is to provide environmental
assessments of existing physical, biological and socio-economic environments during construction
and operational phase of Lower Bom Khola Mini Hydropower project. Since most of the people
mainly depend on i) inadequate existing projects for lighting and, ii) fire wood for cooking,
deforestation is rapidly wide spreading. Therefore, it is believed that after installation of a Mini-hydro
power project, deforestation would be controlled and would have the significant positive impacts in
the environment also. From the project infrastructure development point of view, a few numbers of
trees will be cut and no blasting works will be required. And neither heavy constructional works will
be done. Therefore, there won’t be any adverse environmental effects in the project area.
1.3 Geology of the Project Area

1.3.1 Main Rock Formation
The project area lies at the Higher Himalaya Zone. The predominant rocks of the area are mainly
banded gneiss and garnetiferous biotite schist. The project is situated in the Kalikot (also known as
Budhi Ganga Gneiss) Formation Zone. The Kalikot Formation consists of garnetiferous biotite schists
and micaceous quartzite gneisses and occasional presence of bluish crystalline limestone with schist.
1.3.2 Main Soil Formation

The surficial deposit in the project area is mainly alluvium and colluviums. The colluvial deposits are
mainly found and in the alluvial terraces located on the riverbanks. The alluvium consists of
accumulation of boulder and cobbles in a sandy matrix. The colluvial deposits are mainly along the
base of hill slopes with big rock boulders. The barren land, bushes and vegetation covers the colluvial
and alluvium deposits.
.
1.3.3 Geology of dam and Headwork

The proposed dam site is located at 20 m downstream from a existing Powerhouse (20KW) in Chyan
tole of Chaurikharka VDC-4 with outcrops of bedrock at the LEFT bank and alluvium in the right
bank at an elevation of 2664 m. The rock comprises of medium to thickly bedded, parallel and
continuous banded gneiss with quartz vein. The gneiss has three sets plus random joints. The joints
are close to wide-spaced with low to high persistence. The joint openings are moderate with rough to
smooth surfaces. They are filled with silt and vegetation debris. Physical weathering is prominent
around dam site area and wedge failure is common instabilities. The quaternary deposit (alluvial and
colluvial soils) on the LEFT bank are about 100 m from the stream channel to outcrop. The colluvial
and alluvial deposits consist of gravel, pebbles and boulders mainly. There are three sets of joints. The
hill slope is about 65°.
The attitude of foliation is 205º/60ºNW.
RQD 75-80% (calculated, RQD= 115-3.3Jv)
Rock - very strong, massive blocky to sparsely foliated.
Joint index/condition- 0,5 to 2,0- Rough, iron staining, Irregular to persistent
Joint orientations/spacing Joint set I : 264º/30º (200 mm)
Joint set II : 235º/62º (60 to 200 mm)
Joint set III : 330º/75º (60 mm)
Water inflow - dry
1.3.4 Geology of settling basin

Settling basin has been identified at flat area with thin vegetation and bushes about 50m downstream
from the proposed weir axis which consists of alluvium and seems to be old flood plain. The settling
basin is near to the existing 20 KW Micro-Hydropower plant. The tail water from this micro
hydropower shall be collected in desander and helps to contribute in power generation. Alluvial
deposits consist of gravel, pebbles and boulders.
1.3.5 Geology of headrace canal

The proposed canal alignment runs along the LEFT bank of the Bom Khola. The canal alignment runs
mostly along the alluvial,colluvium deposits and thin vegetation/bushes of alpine climate.About 811m
long canal will carry water from headworks to the surge tank. About 500m long pressure pipe will
convey water from the surge tank to the powerhouse. The alignment is mostly stable however shallow
slope failure has been noticed in some places due to seepage. This should be managed by applying
mitigation measures.
1.3.6 Geology of Surge Tank and Penstock Alignment

Surge Tank is the water controlling chamber from where penstock starts. The suitable location of
Surge Tank is about 500 m downstream from Hadikhola village at thin forest area and bushes at an
elevation of 2626 m. There is also colluvium deposits with stable and moderate slope. The alignment
is mostly stable.
1.3.7 Geology of Power House

The powerhouse is proposed at flat and barren land at Hekpa Gaira about 100 m upward from Hekpa
khola. The rock comprises medium to thick, Parallel and continuous bed of Banded Gneiss with
quartz vein. Flooding problem is expected in powerhouse during high flood in the stream. Therefore,
mitigation is essential from powerhouse to about 50m upstream.
1.3.8 Weathering and Ground Water Condition

The exposure in the LEFT bank of the river is slightly weathered. The highly porous soil of the
project area is not significant for storage of ground water but works as a recharge of river water as
well as rain.
1.3.9 Slope Stability and Geological Hazards

Slope of the project area is stable due to presence of flat terrace of gentle slope and doesn’t contain
any landslide and erosional features. The height differences between river bed and canal alignment is
around 12 meters so there is less probability of the flood hazards. There are no any geological
structures like faults, folds, shear zones, discontinuities but seepage/springs may affect the canal/pipe
so gabion wall is recommended for this vulnerable zone. There is no any sign of past, present and
foreseeable future landslides in this area.
1.4 Construction Materials

A detail survey for the construction material was done during the field study. The Bom Khola and its
tributaries are the major sources of the sediments in the area. Several fluvial terraces and fans
comprising sand, gravel and boulders are marked along both the banks of the Bom Khola and Surke
khola at Surke. Both bank slopes of the project site are covered with colluvial deposits and these areas
can be used to borrow construction materials. On the other hand, river bed material can be used to
produce concrete aggregates (fine and coarse i.e. sand and gravel) after wash out the fines. In the
meantime, fine aggregates for concrete can also be obtained by crushing the oversize material from
riverbed, while processing the same for coarse filter of the main dam. Adequate quarry rocks for
embankment of the upstream can be obtained in the vicinity of the project area. Local construction
materials such as sand, boulders, wood might make the construction cost effective.

Employer's Requirement - EPC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Employer's Requirement - EPC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Employer's Requirement - EPC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Government of Nepal

Ministry of Energy, Water Resources and Irrigation

Khumbu Pasang Lhamu Gaupalika, Solukhumbu

Section 6 – Employer’s Requirements (ERQ)

Section 6 – Employer’s Requirements

Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 6-2

Drawings ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3

Supplementary Information Regarding Works to Be Procured ........................................................... 6-4

Personnel Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 6-5

Equipment Requirements .................................................................................................................... 6-6

III. Supplementary Information

(Regarding Works to Be Procured)

IV. Personnel Requirements

Total Work Experience In Similar

No. Equipment Type and Characteristics Minimum Number Required

12. Tailrace Conduit

15. Power and Energy

(3) Hydro-mechanical Works

The following equipment shall be supplied under the contract:

The following requirement of equipment shall be supplied under the contract:

 All the equipment shall be of a convenient construction for disassembling, inspection

5. Transmission and Distribution Line Works

PART II- I.B: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL WORKS

1. General provisions .............................................................................................. 8

CHAPTER 1. 3 PART II B CIVIL SPECIFICATION

1.6 Standby Equipment

3.2.3 Earth-fill Materials

4.3 Gabion Basket assembly

4.7 Measurement and payment

6.3.2 Start and Duration of Dewatering

7.2.2 Aggregates shall be graded to produce a workable dense concrete.

7.3 Water for Making Concrete

Class Use of Concrete

Mass concrete and plain concrete 25 to 75

25/40 or 20 25 + 1.64 δ - 3.5

Tests Rates of Sampling and Testing

8.12 Placing of concrete

8.14 Curing and protection of concrete

8.19 Concrete Curing and Protection

8.23 Construction joints.

- Mass concrete 48 hrs

Sieve size, mm Percentage passing by weight

9.2 Mix design

14. JOINT SEALING

14.3.2 Material Properties

Retention of initial tensile strength : 75% (minimum)

17.2.4 Side ditch

(7) Size of holes : between 10 mm and 20 mm in diameter

(b) Portland cement

23.27 Light Point

PART II- I.C: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR HYDRO-MECHANICAL WORKS

12.11 Machine Work ............................................................................................................................... 82

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPONENTS

4. DESIGN, CALCULATION, DRAWINGS & MANUALS WITH SOFT COPY

Approved Procedure : 3 sets

5. UNITS AND MEASUREMENT

8. DESIGN AND WORKING STRESSES

10. CHANGE OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT

11. LABELS AND PLATES

12. STANDARDS AND WORKMANSHIP